YFP 290: Getting Ready for Tax Season


Sean Richards, CPA, EA returns to the podcast to discuss difference between tax planning and tax preparation, how effective tax planning can prevent costly mistakes, tax changes for 2023, and the basics of YFP’s Comprehensive Tax Planning. 

About Today’s Guest

Sean Richards, CPA, EA, received his undergraduate degree in Corporate Finance and Accounting, as well as his Master of Accountancy, from Bentley University in Waltham, MA. Sean has been a Certified Public Accountant (CPA) since 2015 and received his Enrolled Agent certification earlier this year. Prior to joining the YFP team, Sean was the Senior Treasury Manager at PRA Group, a global debt buyer based in Norfolk, VA. He began his career at American Tower Corporation where, over 10 years, he held several positions in audit, treasury, and accounting. As the Director of YFP Tax, Sean focuses on broadening the company’s existing tax planning and preparation operations, as well as developing and launching new accounting offerings, including bookkeeping, payroll, and fractional CFO services.

Episode Summary

This week on the YFP Podcast, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, welcomes Sean Richards, CPA, EA, back to the podcast to discuss getting ready for tax season. In their conversation, Tim and Sean discuss the difference between tax planning and tax preparation, how effective tax planning can prevent costly mistakes, tax changes for 2023, and the basics of YFP Comprehensive Tax Planning. Listeners will hear ways to prevent costly mistakes during tax filing season, including building a strategy around PSLF, nuances of real estate investing, and the impact of a side hustle or additional business income. Sean explains that the best way to avoid these mistakes would be through proactive tax planning throughout the year, but in particular, before tax season. Tim leads the conversation to the differences between tax planning and tax preparation, plus various tax changes for the 2023 tax filing season and into the future. Sean shares resources and information on changes to charitable contributions, energy credits, and clean energy credits. Sean closes out the conversation with an introduction to YFP Tax, the new YFP Tax website, and the various services available to clients including YFP’s Comprehensive Tax Planning (CTP), what it is, and the type of client the service would be a good fit for. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and welcome to this week’s episode of the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

Now, aside from being pharmacists with a passion for personal finance, there’s something else that you and I have in common, and that’s that we have to file our taxes each year. Now, I know what you might be thinking. Tim, it’s only January, and the tax filing deadline is still a few months away. 95 days to be exact, in case you’re counting. Do I need to start thinking about taxes right now? 

I get it. But the truth is that now is an important time to shift gears and start thinking about the strategies that you can use to optimize your tax situation, and that’s why I’m excited to welcome back onto the show YFP Director of Tax, Sean Richards, to talk through getting ready for tax season. We discuss on this episode the difference between tax planning and tax preparation and how effective tax planning can prevent costly mistakes. To learn more about the services offered by YFP Tax, you can visit yfptax.com. 

Now, whether you’re looking for help with your individual taxes, business taxes, or both, YFP’s comprehensive tax planning combines traditional filing with our proactive year-round planning process. All right, let’s jump into my interview with YFP Director of Tax, Sean Richards. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:22] TU: Sean, welcome back to the show.

[00:01:24] SR: Thanks for having me, and I’m excited to be here before we get into tax season, while I actually still have a chance to get on the pod and talk to you. 

[00:01:31] TU: Absolutely.

[00:01:32] SR: Catch me in a couple of weeks, and I’m probably going to ignore all of your calls and everything. So get me while you have me.

[00:01:37] TU: Tis the season indeed. We had you on episode 283 not too long ago. We talked about how to optimize your tax situation as a pharmacy professional. We’ll link to that in the show notes for folks that want to go back to that. But as you mentioned, here we are in the midst of tax season, this episode going live right around the middle of January. Sean, this is about the time where we start to see those tax forms coming in the mail. I don’t know. Folks maybe are like me, where I start to pile those up on my desk. Maybe clutter the –

[00:02:06] SR: [inaudible 00:02:06] or whatever. 

[00:02:09] TU: Clutter the countertop a little bit. It’s that visual reminder that we’re going to be filing our taxes. One of the things we’re going to talk about here today, not only what are some things that folks can do to, hopefully, have a smooth tax filing season, but also how can we be strategizing and planning, hopefully, year round and not necessarily just house on fire when we go to file our taxes each April. 

So we’re going to talk in really a few different parts. Number one, what are some of the ways that folks can prevent some of the costly mistakes during filing this season? What are some most common mistakes that you see? We’ll then talk about some of the differences between tax preparation and tax planning. Then we’ll talk about some of the changes that folks need to be aware of for both this tax filing season, some of those coming from the Inflation Reduction Act, and then also some of the things that folks can be looking out for into the future. So I’m ready if you’re ready. Should we do this?

[00:03:07] SR: I’m always ready. Like I said, this is the most ready I’ll be for a while. So here we go.

[00:03:12] TU: So let’s jump into some of the costly mistakes that folks may find themselves making during the filing season. Obviously, we want to avoid this if we can. You recently wrote a blog post on this topic. We’ll link to that in the show notes. But give us some of the examples, as you’ve been talking with many pharmacists that are interacting with YFP Tax, many pharmacy clients. What are some of these examples of mistakes that are being made that if we had some more proactive planning, perhaps we could prevent it?

[00:03:43] SR: Yeah, and thanks for bringing up that blog post because that really gets into the nature of how a lot of these kind of arise and can be prevented. Not to give everything away about that, but the idea of the whole thing is really just sort of being able to go back in time, if you could, right? In a lot of circumstances in life, it would be nice to be able to get a redo and be able to go back and kind of get a mulligan, if you will. But with a lot of things in life, you can’t do that, and taxes are one of those things. 

So I would say the biggest examples where I see pharmacists or anybody really making mistakes when it comes to taxes is not planning ahead and kind of looking back and saying, “Oh boy. I wish I had done that.” So that time that you had a great year, and you made a ton of money, and maybe you’ve had a side gig going, and you had so much cash that you didn’t know what to do with it. But then you come to the end of the year and you didn’t have that cash anymore when your actual tax bill comes due. So, “Oh, I wish I could have put some of that money aside, done a projection, see what I’m going to owe at the end of the year.” Maybe make estimated tax payments if you apply for something like that. 

Or something like, “Hey, real estate’s hot right now.” You bought up a place. You fixed it up. You finally sold it. You hit that peak before interest rates went up, and now you’re sitting there going, “Oh, my goodness. I have to pay taxes on all those capital gains.” What are some things you could have done to maybe make different improvements to the house or take advantage of those improvements against your bases when you’re calculating the taxes? Or, “Hey, maybe I could have invested in some solar property or something.” Take advantage of some of those credits that we’ll talk about with the Inflation Reduction Act. So things of that nature. 

A big one with pharmacists is loan forgiveness, right? PSLF. If you’re looking at this, and you’re saying you did your taxes, and you’re going to apply for forgiveness in the future and say, “Oh, maybe I could have filed separate for my spouse last year. If I had done this a little bit differently, then maybe I could have had some more of my loans forgiven.” So it tends to always be an – I’m not going to say always, but there tends to be a common recurring theme of if I just planned ahead, and I could go back in time and change these things, maybe that problem wouldn’t be there. 

But actually, now that I think about it, I had a personal situation. I like to bring this one up because it’s near and dear to me and if I can ever prevent folks from having the same thing. I know, early in my career, I was lucky enough to have RSUs given, granted to me, and I was a young budding accountant and went to do my taxes and paid the capital gains and said, “Okay, that’s fine. I understand. I cashed them in. I have my capital gains.”

It wasn’t until I was looking at it a little bit down the line and talking to some of my colleagues that I realized I didn’t actually account for that properly. I had already paid taxes on some of that, and then I went and basically double-counted and paid again. So RSUs are one of those things. I know a lot of pharmacists get them. They get excited about them. If you don’t really pay attention or you don’t talk to somebody who knows what they’re doing with these things, you can end up double paying, and the IRS certainly won’t reach out and let you know that you did that. You have to find that on your own.

[00:06:44] TU: Yeah. Sean, to that point, we’ve worked with a lot of the pharmaceutical industry fellowship programs, and as a result, have a handful of those that are in pharmaceutical industry as clients, whether it’s on the planning side or on the tax side. So this is something that we see come up a lot about trying to understand what are RSUs, and what are some of those tax implications. Certainly, student loans, you mentioned PSLF strategy. It’s a big one in our community, real estate. We’ve got a whole separate podcast dedicated to that topic. So of course, that can be something that’s top of mind.

Then the first one you mentioned is something, Sean, I know I’m seeing and hearing more and more of. We featured many pharmacists on the show that are beginning to monetize their clinical expertise in a variety of different ways, whether that’s a business, whether that’s a side hustle, or perhaps a side hustle that turned into a business. As you mentioned, often there’s that new income that’s coming in. By the time we get around to filing, we’re maybe putting that income back into use in the business or other expenses that come up. Then there’s that surprise tax bill. So, yes, we’re doing good. We’re growing the business. We’re achieving that goal of monetizing whatever we’d been working on. But are we proactively planning for, obviously, the tax bill that’s going to be due? How can we plan for that throughout the year? So great examples I know that will touch many people that are listening. 

The next question then is what is the antidote to these mistakes? You mentioned a couple times you were sharing that really that more proactive tax planning, not just necessarily looking at that point of filing, where we’re looking backwards, but really thinking strategically throughout the year can help us not only prevent these mistakes, but also optimize our overall tax strategy. So define for us the difference of tax planning versus tax preparation, and why it’s so important that we understand how these two are so different.

[00:08:36] SR: Sure. So tax preparation is the traditional what you think of with taxes. It’s, hey, you go to your account at the end of the year. You hand them a big box of receipts and say, “Here’s all the stuff.” All the things that you were just talking about you get in the mail, you put a little pile on the table, you bring it to your accountant and say, “These are what I have. This is what I did last year. Get my taxes done for me.” 

That also is the traditional area where people kind of are fearful about taxes or have that stress like, “Oh, my goodness. Am I going to owe something?” Or even getting a big refund can be a good thing. But at the same time, you just gave the government an interest free loan for however long, right? I mean, getting a big refund, there’s probably a pretty good chance you could have done something better with that cash. So that’s typically the surprise or the idea I was talking about like, “Oh, goodness. I wish I had done that in the middle of the year in July,” something like that. 

That’s tax preparation, and it’s not inherently a bad thing. It needs to get done. Again, it’s what most people are familiar with, whether it’s going to an accountant or going on to TurboTax yourself and getting it done. But that also, again, is where a lot of these stresses tend to come from. On the flip side of that is this idea of tax planning. So that is not just thinking about taxes at the end of the year, but making sure that you’re keeping them top of mind throughout the course of the year, and you’re synergizing your tax strategy with your overall financial strategy. 

One thing I want to be clear about is I don’t want people sitting there all day long thinking about tax because, I mean, maybe I want to do that. But a lot of people don’t, and that’s not what we’re getting at with tax planning. It’s not where you’re sitting there all day long and how is this going to impact my taxes? It’s just making sure that when you’re making decisions, that it’s not something that you’re thinking about in April or next filing season. But it’s something that is in your mind. So, hey, I’m thinking about buying a property at the end of the year. What will those implications be from a tax standpoint? Or I’ve been working this side gig. Should I be putting cash aside and trying to plan ahead and everything? 

One analogy, if you’ve ever heard me on the pod, I think I talked about this before. If you’ve ever talked to me in person, you’re probably sick of hearing this one. But I often compare it to tax preparation at the end of the year. It’s like a film editor versus tax planning. It’s like a film director who can kind of change things over the course of the year. A new analogy I’ll kind of introduce this time around, I’m really into cooking. So what I found it to be is tax planning is sort of like reading the recipe, prepping your ingredients, getting everything kind of ready to go. Like you watch these tasty videos. They all have everything measured out, and they’re just pouring it in at the time, and it’s all kind of ready. 

Versus tax preparation is the last step of getting everything plated and putting it all together. Would you want to do all that piece, without having done any of the prep work to begin with? Are you going to try to throw everything together when you haven’t even cut the potatoes or anything yet? No. I mean, ideally, if you’re preparing a meal, you want to also plan, cut the things, read the recipe, and just have a good idea throughout the course of the thing. So that’ll be my new analogy going forward maybe until I get sick of cooking, and then I can come up with something else.

[00:11:35] TU: I’m smiling because I can totally see you this past weekend cooking and thinking, “Oh, I’ve got another analogy for how I’m going to explain tax planning versus tax preparation.” 

[00:11:45] SR: Exactly. I was probably panicking and realize I didn’t cut something ahead of time that I needed to put in and was saying, “Oh, my goodness. If I had just done that ahead of time and made the connection there.” Most likely, this would happen.

[00:11:55] TU: Yeah. I think you’ve given some really good examples, Sean. I was thinking about this this morning. Even when I was working a W-2 job, a pretty simple tax return, pre-kids, there still was this kind of underlying feeling of like, “Am I really optimizing everything?” What I don’t know, I don’t know. Number one, yeah, I could do the TurboTax. I could do the H&R Block. I could figure that out. But how is this really interfacing with the rest of the financial plan? Then, obviously, over time, as things become more complicated, more than one income perhaps or rental properties or children enter the equation, changes of income throughout the year, all these different scenarios where there’s some real time adjustments that you want to make, as well as how can we look at all these things across the plan to make sure we’re optimizing this in the best way we can. 

Sean, you know this because you’re my phone a friend on the tax side. But probably once a week, once every other week, it’s a, “Hey, I’ve got this notice. I’ve got this question. What about this? What’s it looking as we’re thinking about the estimated payment, whether it’s on the business income or question related to the real estate piece?” So there’s just so many things going on, and I feel like I have a high level understanding. But there’s a whole another layer of depth that, obviously, you and others with this expertise have and can really advise people to be thinking across the entirety of what’s going on with the taxes and the financial plan. But also looking at how can we be more proactive than just simply doing the filing each year.

[00:13:24] SR: Yep, I agree. The thing is, is that taxes often become a stressor for folks because they don’t plan ahead. That’s the biggest thing is that you go to your mailbox, and you see a letter, and it says the IRS on the top, and you immediately get this fear in your head. It’s because you think, “Oh, what did I do wrong? Or what should I have done otherwise,” or something like that. 

I mean, it really just comes down to if you are thinking about these things proactively, if you have sort of that phone a friend that you can reach out to throughout the course of the year, you’re not going to be worried when the time comes because you’ll say, “I already talked to him about that. I already know what this is going to be. Oh, this letter from the IRS is just the refund check that I’m expecting to come back from them.” It’s not going to be that fear anymore.

[00:14:02] TU: So let’s shift gears and talk about some of the tax changes that individuals should be aware of. I think one of the main advantages in working with a professional is that you as the individual don’t have to sift through all the changes that are happening and understand the implications to your own plan. You can get the CliffsNotes version of that or someone that’s looking out for you and, obviously, has an understanding of your individual situation. 

Sean, my understanding is there are some changes that folks should be aware of that impact this filing season. Then there’s also some other changes on the horizon that will impact things in the future. Tell us more.

[00:14:36] SR: Yeah. I mean, at this stage of the game, I don’t want to say it’s too late. It’s almost never too late to do really anything. But given that we’re getting into January of 2023 now, not a whole lot to talk about for 2022, but just a couple things to keep top of mind for folks, especially because it’s questions that people may have when they’re talking to their accountant about, “Hey, this looks a little different than last year.” 

So one big thing that will probably be glaring to a lot of folks is there was a $300 above the line, we call it, credit for charitable deductions that has happened for the past couple of years. So that basically, even if you’re not itemizing your deductions, if you’ve made charitable contributions, you were able to take $300 of that as a credit, that is sort of a no more going forward. So in order to take those charitable contributions, you’re going to have to itemize your deductions. 

Again, I just want to point that one out because I know a lot of people, it was right there on the front of the – On the form. So a lot of people will probably think, “Hey, what happened to that?” But that also brings up a good point that you always want to – Another reason why working with a tax professional stay on top of these things is really helpful because different states, different jurisdictions all have different rules when it comes to these things. I know I was just talking about charitable contributions, for example. In the state of Arizona, that’s actually something where you’re able to make donations up until the filing date. Sort of like you can traditionally with IRA accounts when you think of on the federal side of things. 

That’s another reason why I say even though it might seem like it’s too late, it’s not always too late, and you really want to keep in mind that different states and different jurisdictions have different kind of rules with that. 

[00:16:05] TU: Which is why, Sean, you love the Ohio jurisdiction and the [inaudible 00:16:09], right? Isn’t that your favorite? 

[00:16:11] SR: Yeah. Love would be one word that I could use to describe it. I would definitely say that that’s one of them. It keeps me on top of my game. I could say that too. I’m running out of nice things to say. But, yep, sure, we’ll go with that. 

Sticking on the subject of sort of top of mind 2022, things to keep in mind, one of them – This is not so much of a, hey, it’s something that you can still do now, just something that you’re going to want to really be careful of, especially when you’re talking to your accountant and probably trying to argue. Hey, how come I’m not getting the credit for this or something? You alluded to the Inflation Reduction Act. So that was the act that President Biden signed back in August. So a lot of changes to a lot of things, specifically, energy credits, things of that nature. A good number of changes to keep an eye on there. 

A big one is the Residential Clean Energy Credit. So that is traditionally – Forgive me, I can’t think of the old name. They keep changing the names of these things. But keep in mind solar, geothermal, that type of thing, really the renewable energy sources. So that was supposed to drop down to a 26% credit in 2022. That bumped back up to 30% in 2022, and that’s going to go all the way out through 2032. So that’s a good one to keep in mind. 

Electric cars, that’s another one, very important. So as of – The date on this one is August 16th. So if you bought a car before August 16th of last year, electric car, sort of the old rules, I won’t get into those. You’re probably familiar with them. If you bought a car beginning August 16th and through the end of last year, an electric car, there’s a final assembly requirement where your vehicle must have been assembled in North America. Those rules apply as of August 16th of last year, so something definitely to keep in mind there. 

Then going forward into 2023, if you purchase a car in this year going forward, there’s not only final assembly rules, but there’s mineral sourcing rules. There’s sort of battery component rules. So a lot stricter requirements there. We can link to – The Department of Energy has a good list where you can kind of put in your VIN and see if your vehicle qualifies and what it is. But the long story short there is it’s $7,500 credit going forward. But again, you want to keep those dates in mind whenever you purchase the vehicle. So it’s kind of one of those things to keep in mind now. 

That’s a good segue into 2023. So again, closing the door in 2022, a lot of good things heading into 2023, specifically around those energy credits. We talked about new – Or electric vehicles. We talked about new electric vehicles. But starting this year might bring a lot of people into the used market here, so used electric vehicles. That will be a new credit, 30% up to 4k of those. So that’s something definitely to look forward to. 

Energy credits, again, not so much on the solar geothermal side, but more on the, hey, I got new doors, new windows, the typical sort of regular household improvements. You’re probably familiar with those being a $500 lifetime credit. That starting this year going forward is actually going to be a $1,200 annual credit, so that is quite the jump there. Definitely some new restrictions and everything to keep an eye on. Obviously, you want to talk to an accountant about all that kind of stuff. But that’s a very big jump from $500 a lifetime to $1,200 a year. So definitely want to take advantage of that going forward.

[00:19:34] TU: Is that one that if I invest, I don’t know, $10,000 in new windows, that you can disperse that credit over several years? Or is it within the year of purchase for 1,200, right? Because a lot of those examples you gave, windows, doors, roofs, etc. are, obviously, going to be fairly significant expenses.

[00:19:54] SR: Yeah. It’s in the year that you actually dole out the cash that you get the credit back. In a lot of cases, these credits are nonrefundable. So what that means is that if you, at the end of the day, don’t owe anything or don’t have any taxes to offset, you don’t get that credit back for you. So refundable credit basically means, hey, if I actually offset all of my taxes and still then get some, you’ll actually get that back as a refund. 

A lot of these energy credits, you just want to take a look at all of them. I won’t get into which of which. But some of those are nonrefundable, meaning they’ll offset your taxes that year but not going forward.

[00:20:30] TU: Which is another great example of planning, right? 

[00:20:31] SR: Of planning. Exactly, exactly right. You beat me to it, where if you’re making a big capital purchase, you say, “All right, I’m putting in these new windows or I’m getting this solar. I’m finally getting it done,” you want to make sure you have the taxes to offset. Maybe you sell some of those investments that you’ve had for a while. Take on some of those capital gains. Use the credits to offset it or – That’s where that tax planning definitely comes into play. Absolutely. You’re taking my job, man.

[00:20:56] TU: Sorry. It was a good example. I was just thinking about all – Obviously, a large percent of our community may be doing home improvement projects, other things. This is a common one, I think, will be coming up.

[00:21:05] SR: Absolutely. Yep. But, yeah, I mean, sticking to this year, I don’t want to say it was a boring year. Every year from a tax standpoint is exciting in my mind. But the biggest thing I would say outside of the energy stuff, the name of the game has been inflation. So obviously, inflation is top of mind for a lot of folks. So a lot of inflation-related changes going into next year, and what does that mean? Mostly means limits are going up for a lot of things. 

So 401(k), deferral limits. That was up $2,000. That’ll be 2,500 this year. Catch up deposits also up 1,000, so that’ll be $7,500 this year. IRA contributions went up $500, so that’s $6,500 this year. The catch up stayed the same on that, but similarly, inflation. So starting next year, 2024, that will be indexed to inflation. That’s another one there. Tax brackets, so all the tax brackets were bumped up a bit due to inflation. I’m not going to get into the specifics of which one. Each of those, each of the limits are there. The overall story is that you basically can make more money before you bump into that next bracket. 

But the one thing I really want to hone in on there is a lot of people don’t really – I don’t want to say don’t understand the concept of tax brackets. But a lot of people think, “Oh, I don’t want to make another $1,000 because that’s going to bump me into the next bracket. Or how’s that affect me? Is that going to put me the next tax bracket? Or how’s that look with everything?” I just want to make sure a lot of folks on here understand the idea of incremental dollars being taxed at that next bracket. So what does that mean? 

If you’re right on the edge, and you make an extra $100 that bumps you into that next tax bracket, that $100 will be at the new tax rate. The rest of your cash is all getting taxed at the rates that you were before. So I don’t want anybody here who’s got two job offers on the table and saying, “I don’t want to take this higher one because it’s going to put me in the next tax bracket.” That’s not how it works. It’s only going to be a couple extra dollars. I know that’s a big scary one. So that’s where you hear about effective rates and everything. There’s a lot we can get into there, but I just don’t want to scare folks any more than they already are.

[00:23:07] TU: Sean, it reminded me as you’re talking. I’m sure many folks listening are familiar with the Schitt’s Creek episode, where David is talking about the tax-write offs and the things that he’s buying because they’re tax-write off, right? This –

[00:23:20] SR: Write-off, yeah. 

[00:23:20] TU: It’s like we need an episode on the incremental approach. I mean, you hear that all the time of like, “Oh, I don’t want to go in the next tax bracket. Or if I earn additional money, I’m going to go into that.” I think a lot of that may come from the misunderstanding of how that works in terms of the incremental approach.

[00:23:37] SR: Exactly, right. You’d never want to turn down more cash. I think we had talked about before. But even though it might not seem like the best thing, a bigger tax bill at the end of the day generally means that you actually did better that year.

[00:23:49] TU: Yeah. Well, this is great stuff, Sean, and I want to transition. One of things we’re really excited about as we head into this tax filing season is that for new clients of YFP Tax, we’re really putting a stake in the ground that we’re not doing filing only. One of the reasons we got to that decision point was everything that we’re talking about right here, which is that we really feel like tax when done well is really proactive. It’s strategic, and we’re thinking about this year round so that we can optimize that situation. Yes, filing is a part of that, of course, but we really need to be thinking more strategically. 

So that’s one of the reasons that we are really excited, Sean, to be introducing YFP’s what we’re calling CTP, comprehensive tax planning. Tell us more about what it is, who is it for, and potentially who is it not for as well. 

[00:24:39] SR: Yeah. So comprehensive tax planning is – It’s a lot of what we had talked about before, right? So the idea of really synergizing your tax strategy with the rest of your financial strategy. It’s something where you’re touching base with us throughout the course of the year, and it really depends on what your individual needs are. It’s not something where we’re saying, “Hey. Every Friday at five o’clock, we’re all getting on the call. It’s the YFP Tax happy hour. We’re all going to talk about taxes and everything.” That’s not what this is all about. It’s really for everybody to look at their own situation and say, “Hey, I’m looking for more guidance on my withholdings.” Maybe it’s something where we’re meeting a couple times a year to talk about, “Hey, I have this new side job. I think I have to make estimated payments now. Can we talk about what that looks like?”

Or maybe it’s something where I have a real estate property that I’m thinking about purchasing at the end of the year, but I don’t even want to begin to go down that path until I can talk about what are the implications here. What if I rent it out a couple days a year? What if I rent it out 100 days a year? How’s that look? Can I live there? What are the tax implications? So it’s really for folks who want to not wait until the end of the year, like I said, and say, “Hey, here’s my box of receipts. I’ll see you next April. Get my stuff done,” and who really want to be able to sleep at night when it comes to taxes and don’t want to open up their mailbox and say, “Oh, no. It’s the IRS. What could this possibly be?”

[00:26:01] TU: Sean, if I’m interested in learning more about the comprehensive tax planning or perhaps even ready to get started, where’s the best place that I should go?

[00:26:09] SR: So the best place to go would be yfptax.com. So that’s our new and improved website we launched recently. It has a lot of different resources on there. It has the blog that you mentioned before, a lot of videos that we posted throughout the course of the year with some of these updates and some of these new tax laws that we’re talking about. It really has a breakdown of all the different services that we have. 

So whether it’s the comprehensive tax planning, CTP, that we’re talking about here, or maybe you have a side gig and you’re interested in doing some bookkeeping for that. We offer bookkeeping services, all the way from, “Hey, I just have a couple of contractors I need to do payroll for,” all the way up through what we call our fractional CFO service, which is more of the, “Hey, let’s sit down. Let’s talk strategy about my business. Let’s put some forecasts and budgeting together and everything.” That website will have a great starting point to get you started. 

But from there, you can get in touch with me. I’ll answer any questions you have. We can get on the phone. If you want to look at my face, we can get a Zoom call together. Or I’m happy to talk via email, answer any questions. So you can reach me personally at [email protected]. Again, you can also go to www.ypftax.com. You’ll get links to me. You’ll get links to all the things that we’re talking about here. That’s the best place to start. 

What I would say is, definitely, if you’re interested, don’t wait. We’re getting into tax season. I know that I’m biased to say that, but I think you’re going to lose a lot of us in a couple of weeks. So might be not a bad time to hop on there and take a look.

[00:27:34] TU: Don’t wait indeed. This is really the – Now, I’m not going to say quiet. You guys got a lot of stuff going on, but really the lull before the storm that is the tax season and then, obviously, some hibernation of rest and recovery thereafter. So make sure to head on over to yfptax.com. Lots more information there. As Sean mentioned, you can reach out to him directly to set up a call, get some more information. If you’re ready to get going, you can also click on a complete a quick form. You can get started. But all the information is there on the website. 

Sean, thanks so much, and we look forward to hearing from you after tax season.

[00:28:06] SR: Thank you. Yeah. It’s definitely the calm before the storm. But like I said, it’s sort of like if you watch the weather channel before a hurricane. Even though it’s the calm, everybody’s still prepping and getting ready and everything. Then once it’s all said and done, yeah, it’ll be nice to touch base in May once everything’s kind of a little bit calmer.

[00:28:23] TU: Great stuff. Thanks, Sean. 

[00:28:24] SR: Thank you.

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:28:25] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 289: Building Pricklee with Pharmacy Entrepreneur Kun Yang


Kun Yang, a pharmacist and Co-Founder & CEO of Pricklee Cactus Water, shares how and when he knew the entrepreneurial path was right for him. In this episode, he discusses the experience of being on Shark Tank, where he effectively navigated a negotiation with two sharks that led to a deal, and the most important skills he has had to acquire as an entrepreneur leading a growing company.

About Today’s Guest

Kun Yang is a recent dad and pharmacist-turned-CPG entrepreneur. He grew up in Canada but has spent his professional life in the United States, where he is building his business, Pricklee Cactus Water, with some incredible humans who want to make the world a better place.

Pricklee is on a mission to inspire people to be resilient like the cactus through health, happiness, and sustainability. The refreshing cactus waters are made from the drought-tolerant prickly pear cactus and packed with antioxidants, electrolytes, and vitamin C, with 50% less sugar than coconut water. It’s 100% refreshing, with 0% pricks.

Kun is passionate about brand building, CPG, leadership, founder stories, futurism, mental health, and all things wellness. He looks forward to connecting and learning from others that build businesses through conscious capitalism!

Episode Summary

This week on the YFP Podcast, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, welcomes fellow pharmacist and Co-Founder & CEO of Pricklee Cactus Water, Kun Yang, to the show. Highlights from this episode include hearing Kun talk about how and when he knew that an entrepreneurial path was right for him, the experience of being on Shark Tank, and the skills he has had to acquire on his entrepreneurial journey leading a growing beverage company. The discussion begins with Kun sharing his start in pharmacy, his pharmacy education, the moment he realized that a traditional pharmacy path might not be right for him, and the surprising story of how he got started as an entrepreneur. Kun speaks on how Pricklee came to be, his experience navigating negotiation with two sharks on Shark Tank, and ultimately getting a deal for Pricklee. With the added attention from the show, Kun shares how Shark Tank positively impacted the business in unexpected ways. He discusses the power of having a mentor, the skills needed to be a true leader, how he views leadership, and how he is cultivating a culture of growth in his company. Listeners will also hear an interesting parallel between parenting and entrepreneurial leadership. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

On this week’s episode, I welcome fellow pharmacist and the Co-Founder and CEO of Pricklee Cactus Water, Kun Yang. Highlights from the show include hearing from Kun about how and when he knew the entrepreneurial path was right for him, what the experience was like being on Shark Tank, where he effectively navigated a negotiation with two sharks that led to a deal, and the skills that he has had to acquire that have been most important to his entrepreneurial journey and leading a growing beverage company.

Now, before we jump into today’s show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one-on-one with more than 250 households in 40-plus states. YFP Planning offers fee-only high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one-on-one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. 

Okay, let’s jump into my interview with Kun, the Co-Founder and CEO of Pricklee Cactus Water.

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:20] TU: Kun, welcome to the show. 

[00:01:21] KY: Glad to be here, Tim. Nice to see you again.

[00:01:23] TU: So we had an interesting crossing of paths through a mutual connection in the biopharmaceutical industry space, where we’ve done some personal finance education with some of the fellowship programs. You spent the early part of your career, before working on Pricklee, in an industry role. So let’s start there. Tell us about your career path into pharmacy, where you went to school, and what led you to going down that path of industry.

[00:01:50] KY: Yeah. So I graduated from the University of Maryland School of Pharmacy 2015. I have a lot of pride in my alma mater, and I think many people might relate to this. But it’s almost like the further removed you get, the more you realize how lucky really you were in that situation. But I had a chance to kind of go back this past year as the white coat speaker, and it just brought back a flood of just really incredible memories and just appreciation for just how difficult it is to be faculty and kind of lead the next generation of youth and just had a lot of proud moments to kind of know where we kind of came from in that space. 

But I kind of grew up all over the place. I mostly grew up in Canada, and I always knew that I wanted to pursue health and wellness and many different components and also had a very, I guess, just entrepreneurial mindset to begin with. So I think pharmacy really kind of attracted me because fundamentally so much of pharmacy as an industry has been built upon independent business. Just the kind of skills that are required to be successful, to be able to socialize, to connect with your patients and provide value and help them lead healthier and better lives and be that trusted partner really kind of just gravitated to that profession. 

As I entered pharmacy school, I think I realized that there was a lot of different ways that we could make an impact in society. Over time, as I learned more and more about all the incredible opportunities to affect population health and take all the skills that we were getting in pharmacy school and apply them in really creative ways, yeah, I just naturally gravitated towards more “nontraditional” roles. But I would just say that they were just roles that I think allowed us to flex additional skills that we didn’t know we had, and then eventually ended up pursuing a fellowship through MCPHS at Biogen in a sort of medical value-based outcomes type program, which is sort of a managed care-focused direction because I was very involved with AMCP and was very interested in the whole population, health management piece of that profession, going into graduation. Then through that, just really found myself appreciating and just developing a lot of incredible skills in the biotech pathway.

[00:03:57] TU: You and I talked maybe a week or two ago, and we’re talking about for those students that have that business or entrepreneur type of desire, I think the industry pathway is a natural one where there’s some exposure to that. But certainly, that’s still a step away from entrepreneurship and growing your own company, still a very different experience working within an organization, although, of course, less clinical and more business minded. 

I’m curious, before we talk about Pricklee specifically, was there a moment during your fellowship or perhaps a moment in your first job where you looked around and you’re like, “Man, this just isn’t for me. I’ve got this entrepreneurial itch. I’ve got this pharmacy degree. Maybe I’ve been down this pathway, but like I don’t see myself doing this for 30 years.”

[00:04:43] KY: I think there were a lot of moments. When I look back, it wasn’t like I think one specific. I mean, I do have a specific moment that I’ll share, but I think there were a lot of feelings that I think that felt familiar to me, even in that moment, that I can kind of trace back and say, “Okay, this kind of makes a lot of sense.” So the moment really was walking into – I just finished our fellowship, and programming had started at a new company with a spinoff of our existing fellowship business. I kind of just walked in and had really, really fallen in deep appreciation for the opportunity and the people that I was working with. 

But I think one of the days I kind of walked in, and I looked around, and this was still pretty early on in our journey, but something hit me that I had always thought that through all the different career changes and exploration of getting to that point that going this “non-traditional” path would have led me to move away from this feeling of “imposter syndrome” or feeling like everything that I was doing was actually getting more and more specific. It was because it was leading me to a point of clarity, right?

Really, over time, I realized that imposter syndrome and point of clarity had a lot to do with an understanding of who I wasn’t, as opposed to understanding of who I was. I think that’s something that probably a lot of us can relate to is growing up in your 20s and maybe sometimes early 30s, you have a lot of ideas of maybe what you don’t like to do, right? What are some of the things that don’t excite you? What are some of the general things that do excite you? But you may not really understand specifically why or what you’re really good at to allow you to succeed in those roles. 

Again, all those feelings led to that one moment I walked in and looked around in this open office setting. I was kind of like, “Man, there’s a lot of incredibly talented and smart individuals around me. And if I work really, really hard here for another 15, 20 years, I can really be like one of them.” These were at the time, again, all my heroes I look up to that kind of forged the pathway for us before. I guess it hit me in that moment that there wasn’t a specific role that I could look at and say like that is exactly in specific what I wanted to do. I think that that was my – I call it a quarter life crisis moment of really all that imposter syndrome bubbling and kind of blowing up all at once, realizing that, wait a second, how could I have done all this and pursued all this specificity, only to feel this still in this moment? There’s not much more specificity I could pursue. 

That was when it really kind of became an introspective question of like is there something outside of pharmacy that I could apply my skills to, still within the health and wellness space that we’re really passionate about, that I could find truth and clarity? 

[00:07:17] TU: Where do you attribute – Obviously, you have an entrepreneurial spirit and desire. You’re pursuing that with the work that you’re doing at Pricklee, and I suspect this may not be the first venture and the last one that you’re going to do. Where do you attribute that entrepreneur spirit coming from?

[00:07:33] KY: It’s a really good question. I think it is family-driven in many, many ways, right? I’m a first generation American. My father actually immigrated over from China when I was one and then moved over to Canada when I was three and a half. To see kind of his journey and where he came from, where it was a small farm town that was – He was the first person in his entire family lineage to graduate high school and then did do college and all that stuff, and it wasn’t like there were resources around him. 

So for him to kind of persevere and find a way through all that, pursue higher education, and then bring us over and provide, create a better life for his family, and then give us this opportunity then to live a really privileged life of education, of connectivity, of culture, of just growing up in North America, Canada, and the US, and really being shielded from a lot of that and realizing that, for me, a lot of the journey of getting to really, I guess, in many ways what I had initially idealize as the pinnacle of success, which was I think much more defined from a lower wealth generation value standpoint of like earning and salary and maybe comfort from a capitalistic standpoint. Getting to that point and realizing that it was much more than that, that was behind the growth that my father and sacrifices my father had made. 

To look at that journey that he went on as a pretty entrepreneurial one himself, I think I got a lot of that same sort of mentality of like, okay, this still feels like the great opportunity has been presented. How can you take this opportunity and truly make a bigger impact? And take that opportunity and say if you have that privilege, and you have the connections and maybe the skill sets and the network to do more, to truly make an impact on society. Can you look introspectively and find authenticity in that journey to make that impact as positive and helpful as possible? So that’s really kind of where I think the initial energy came from.

[00:09:31] TU: I love that, Kun. One of the things I’ve been thinking about a lot lately, and I think your alma mater could give them some credit, is light years ahead in terms of a focus around entrepreneurship and nontraditional career paths. They put some specific efforts in that area to really be intentional and brand themselves as such. But I’ve often thought like we recruit for someone who wants to be a pharmacist and that clinical type of a mindset and then hope we can apply some entrepreneurial principles on top of that. I almost wonder if we need to flip the script in that like you recruit people that have an entrepreneurial mindset or interest, and then pharmacy gets overlaid on top of that. It’s just a totally different shift in how someone is thinking. 

I think what’s interesting about your journey, and I think there’s a lot of people that may feel some of that imposter syndrome or feel that tug and pull of like, “Hey, I have an interest in this or that, but my identity is in I have a PharmD, or I’ve done a fellowship, or I’ve done two years of residency.” We know the reality of the sunk cost fallacy of, “Hey, I’m $200,000 in, right? And I’m not going to pivot or take that risk.” So I just think there’s a really neat opportunity for our academic institutions to be able to take this up and see what we can do in terms of some of the disruption that’s happening in our profession and how can we, especially as we train the next generation of pharmacists, be a part of that. I think to Maryland’s credit, they’re making some progress in this area, which is pretty cool.

[00:10:56] KY: I think that that’s a very, very, very astute point. I would just say like still early on in my journey, so I imagine that my view on this and perspective will change over time. But I would say that what I found in our in our journey, where we’ve kind of really broken into multiple industries now and almost from the bottom up and try to find value in that, it really comes down to aligning the journey to some core set of values that are intrinsic to an individual. I think that that’s something that a lot of institutions have maybe not done effectively. I think, obviously, professionalism, and I think core behaviors of what a profession should look and act like are definitely important. 

But I do think that sometimes a lot of students come into these professions with personal values that are maybe extremely different, right? These personal values are often shaped by households and maybe by your initial friend network, right? I guess the challenge of this is then if most people are within this way of, this mindset of thinking you go through life, really kind of reflecting the same values that you’ve kind of been around since you were a kid, right? Your parents’ values and the friends that you’ve kind of grown up with. 

It’s really hard to break free from that, right? Because as you get more and more within a bubble of people in terms of the work that you do, your interests become even more specific. The challenges that you own become more specific. It’s probably very hard for an average pharmacist to relate to like the challenges that a construction worker, for example, would relate to day-to-day. So naturally, these worlds don’t collide as often as you would see, right? So what does that really result in? That results in people finding answers to like these bigger questions of like how do we become more entrepreneurial? Or what can we do with our pharmacy professions? 

They find answers amongst their direct community. Why is that challenging? Well, it’s challenging because a lot of people that go into higher education, they come from families where maybe their parents didn’t do this, right? Or maybe this is now a wealth generation they’ve entered making pretty healthy salaries, where their parents didn’t have that luxury, right? So what happens is you’re not asking maybe your reference point of like what success looks like is anchored to people that have never had the type of wealth opportunity that you do now. So to find answers to the questions that like, well, what’s next? If we’ve hit our milestones of getting your house or like having children and doing these things that seemed like, pretty far reaching milestones previously, and you’re starting to trend in that direction, where it’s pretty feasible, then you start thinking, “Well, what’s next right?” Then the answers often become, okay, invest your money, do these things, and grow your wealth. 

Then simultaneously, alright, who else would you ask? You ask your friends and your colleagues, who, again, were raised by the same kind of parents that you’ve been around. So it’s really hard to get answers to these bigger questions of how do you make more out of the way that our institutions are set up when a lot of the influence of what the values are in society are really limited to the same influences and values that you were raised with, right? So what I found is when you want to answer a question as big as what’s next, ask people that have done those things. So a lot of the mentors that I’ve met in my life that have made these tremendous impacts, I mean, they’ve built and exited companies, global companies. They’ve done these things. Time and time and again, you start to realize that oftentimes the value system changes from one of just wealth creation to one where you start to realize that your wealth is really a set of tools that you can leverage to create value for others and to create not just a better life for yourself but for your profession, for people around you, for anyone, right? 

I think as you meet more and more successful people that have gone through that journey, you really feel that, and it’s not only just really inspiring to see that that’s really what people stand for at the end of the day, but that that’s what the world and the universe tends to reward in the long term.

[00:15:04] TU: It’s such a great point, and I’m reading right now Hangry by the GrubHub founder. It’s a great book. It reminds me a lot of Shoe Dog. It’s another great read on kind of an entrepreneurial startup story, that one, obviously, of Nike and Phil Knight. But he talks about in the GrubHub journey like his initial goal was like do this thing to be able to pay off student loans. Then it gets to this point where he raises $31 million, and he gives up a stake of a company, and then it’s like, “Oh, wow. This got like really real. And, obviously, I’m now exceeding that goal, and there’s on to something else.” 

Then, obviously, at some point, he exits what will be a multibillion-dollar company, and then he’s kind of asking this question of like, alright, that wealth and, obviously, paying off that debt was a very small goal that wealth was achieved. But like I’m trying to find my identity back of like who am I, what do I want to be, what do I want to be my legacy and my contribution. 

So let’s shift gears and talk about Pricklee. For those that aren’t familiar with Pricklee yet, and I hope they will become soon, if they’re not already or they haven’t tried the product, what is it, and how did the idea come to be?

[00:16:07] KY: Yeah. No, it’s definitely an interesting story. So Pricklee is a cactus water. It’s a delicious, refreshing cactus water made from really the most sustainable and resilient plant on the planet, the prickly pear cactus. It’s packed with electrolytes, antioxidants, vitamin C, that just offers superior and natural hydration. It’s about half the sugar and calories of a coconut water, and it’s really just good in smoothies by itself, mixed drinks, and really any which way you want to have it. So that’s really what Pricklee is. 

We actually created Pricklee right in the middle, again, of our fellowship. Our co-founder, Mo, grew up in Lebanon, and his grandma used to make prickly pear mixed drinks, prickly pear just smoothies, prickly pear just hydration beverages all summer long. It’s his favorite thing going up with him and his siblings. So one day, when he was shopping at our local grocery store, and he saw prickly pears in the market, he was blasted with nostalgia. He’s like, “I have to bring this back to my friends.” So he shared it with us. We were just blown away by the taste. 

Then being in health care, we look at the benefits. That was really, really interesting as well. I think over time, we just realized like this is such an amazing opportunity to take a health and wellness platform, introduce an ingredient that meant something, significant to one of us, and then find ourselves in this, and that journey of really discovering authenticity through the creation of Pricklee, and figuring out that we could leverage the platform of the cactus to inspire people to be resilient. To really promote health, happiness, and sustainability became really what our core mission was. Then over time, really that mission manifested itself into a company that we now are privileged enough to be able to support and to grow every single day.

[00:17:47] TU: So I want to talk about your Shark Tank experience. You and your co-founder, Mo, also a pharmacist, appeared on Shark Tank, season 13, episode 22. We’ll link to it in the show notes, if folks want to go back and watch it. You were looking for $200,000 for 5% equity, which equates to a $4 million valuation. I want to talk about the numbers. But first, I want to hear about the experience. What was it like walking through those doors, and how did you prepare for that opportunity? Because as I’ll ask you in a moment, there were some instances in your responses with the sharks that it was clear you had done a lot of preparation. So I’m curious to hear how you went about that preparation. 

[00:18:28] KY: Yeah. So we’d spent almost two years just sort of beta testing our product at farmer’s markets, figuring out how this whole industry worked. It was really, really something that just blew our minds because of how complex the industry was and the different aspects that went into it from D2C e-commerce, to retail, to supply chain, to operations, to production, to sales and marketing. I mean, there’s just so much to uncover, and it took us some time to really grapple around that. So we didn’t launch until February 2021. 

Something to note of that is, I think, pharmacists and STEM individuals, specifically, are fantastic entrepreneurs because testing is so ingrained in our DNA. So we really went through it pretty – Really kind of taking our emotion out of it as much as we could. But in any case, we launched in February of ‘21. Within the first week, we’d run these Facebook ads and the production studio at Shark Tank, at SEMA, and these ads. So they reached out and were like, “Hey, you guys should apply.” We thought it was a complete scam. We had no idea this was real thing. But we pursued it. Next thing you knew, we had this gigantic application. It was like 40 pages. I mean, we were just spewing out all aspects of our life in this application.

This ended up being like a 16-month process from when we first [inaudible 00:19:44] to when we’d been filmed and then when we finally aired the following May. So it was probably the longest kept secret of our lives. When we started getting through the process, the team assigned us a production staff that really helped us kind of frame the pitch, prepare us for the kind of conversations that we’re going to have. A lot of that was just, again, an ongoing 16-month journey that eventually led to the air date on Mother’s Day weekend, actually May of 2022.

[00:20:15] TU: I’m curious. Yesterday, I was listening to a podcast of the founder of 1-800-GOT-JUNK?, and he had talked about a moment in their business, which it took them eight years to get to a million dollars in revenue, and now they’re north of $600 million a year. So a very patient slow growth and then, obviously, more of an explosion of that over time. But he talked about this instance where, after a lot of persistence, they got on to Oprah, a huge opportunity, couldn’t hire enough people to have the phones ready after that went live. But they didn’t have a same experience when they went on The Ellen Show. It was actually very quiet after that, and part of that had to do with, obviously, people can more easily get in touch now than they could when they went back on a previous show with Oprah. 

But I’m curious how defining of a moment was that? Or was that not in terms of that goes live, and the business changes?

[00:21:07] KY: Yeah. I mean, I definitely think it was it was a defining moment. I think a lot of companies find a lot of luck in different components. You kind of have to. I mean, timing luck, it’s in every company’s journey. Shark Tank has manifested as one of those things for us, for sure. We had been on this like interesting media tour. Leading up to Shark Tank, we had actually filmed TODAY Show in August, right before we had filmed Shark Tank in September. That was a pretty big deal. I mean, Al Roker drinking your product on air. I mean, sharing your story. We got some texts about it. But it wasn’t comparable to the Shark Tank experience. 

I mean, I think there’s something societally and culturally relevant about Shark Tank in the connection that every person has with that being like some pinnacle of entrepreneurship and a goal, and a milestone I think a lot of people will look for in starting businesses. So I think that there’s something innately exciting about it. Still to this day, anytime people see our booth, our materials, see us out in public with Pricklee, like we definitely get people being like, “Oh, we saw you guys on Shark Tank.” We always – The number of times we’ve had to tell the story of like, “What was that like?” It’s definitely something that we’re passionate about. But it was definitely one of those things where that was absolutely Shark Tank. 

[00:22:23] TU: Not once. I don’t think not once did you or Mo mentioned that you were a pharmacist on that show. Was that an intentional move?

[00:22:30] KY: I think we actually did but –

[00:22:32] TU: Oh, did you?

[00:22:32] KY: Well, so the time that you’re in there is quite a bit longer than what actually gets aired. We think we’ve been there for almost 45 minutes. It was cut to eight. They did a really good job of actually representing the conversation and negotiate the intent of it. But, I mean, at the end of the day, I mean, they’re trying to put on a good show and trying to make it very, very snappy and quick. 

It was funny. We had like a couple of our partners and friends actually fly in and put on cactus suits to like introduce the brand and the products, and that entire segment was cut out. So it was really funny. I mean, they were there. You saw them. But the whole dance sequence entrance, that was cut out. I guess they weren’t – I guess we just didn’t rehearse well enough, or like it wasn’t entertaining enough for dancers across the US. But, yeah, I know. We talked about it, I think, a couple of times. But definitely within the 45-minute segment, they cut that down to 8 minutes.

[00:23:22] TU: So one of the things Tim and I were talking about this, Tim, my partner at YFP last week, he does a lot of teaching on negotiation. One of the things that happened in the Shark Tank episode, at least, of the eight minutes that they filmed, is when Kevin – He went on this rant of, “I hate beverage deals. However, I like this product.” He ended up countering that. I think it was $200,000 for a 20% stake, instead of a 5% stake. Then you had a brilliant response, and you said something along the lines of how are we supposed to do that? Then you provide the rationale behind the how are we supposed to do that, in terms of needing the cash flow and so forth to grow and sustain the business, which is a textbook calibrated question or negotiation. 

The book, How I Split the Difference, Chris Voss, he talks about this question precisely. So I assume you were prepared for that specific type of instance, where you had to negotiate. Was that fair?

[00:24:17] KY: Yeah. Yeah, absolutely. I mean, no Shark Tank deal goes on air and comes out the way that it was presented. It was kind of incredible how textbook the negotiation went to how we had prepared. We expected them to go to 20%. We expected Kevin in negotiation and then go to a royalty deal [inaudible 00:24:34]. Then our whole bottom line was going to be to offer the initial deal at a 5% line of credit. So the fact that it played out to a tee was just mind-blowing, I think, in terms of the preparation of that and to feel like we were actually in control of the entire conversation was pretty. 

One of our first actual adviser, Patrick Muldoon, who’s the previous CEO of Zola Coconut Water and Detour Bar, an incredibly brilliant guy. He was the one that, to your point, brought up Chris Voss, How I Split the Difference. We read that. We kind of really prepared. What happens when this likely scenario occurs that somebody’s – Let’s say you left with one truck, and you have an offer, and it’s 20%. The fact that, again, happened at that exact moment was really funny. This is a guy who’s gone through so many tough negotiations in this life and I think can really speak to experience with it. Just he kind of coaches the same thing.

Like at the end of the day, when you’re in a tough situation, I think that the best thing to do is ask questions, right? There, you’re faced with an impossible situation or impossible task or ask, which oftentimes is the case with Shark Tank. These deals are impossible deals. Yeah. Yeah. Like you ask the question of like, well, lean into their expertise and experience and figure out what is it that they’re looking for? Oftentimes, that opens up the conversation from seeming like your back against the wall, no counter. This is the final offer on the last shark, to then turning that into an actual conversation where that results in negotiation. That’s absolutely part of the game.

[00:26:01] TU: It’s interesting seeing Barbara jump back in. I didn’t see that coming. Then I thought it was cool that you guys got caught a little bit in the middle for the benefit of at least the show, where there’s, obviously, an ego play going on between the two of them that she – So that was fun to watch.

[00:26:17] KY: Yeah. We were like, “Was this about us?”

[00:26:19] TU: Right. Kun, I’m curious that as your role expands, obviously, you’re leading a rapidly growing beverage company. I don’t think any schooling, including a PharmD program and even one that has more of an entrepreneurship focus, I don’t think any schooling can prepare someone for the work and the leading that you’re doing now. I’m curious, what what skills, if you had to pick one or two, we just mentioned negotiation potentially one, what skills have you really had to develop and hone that have proven to be most valuable to you in terms of leading this company?

[00:26:52] KY: Well, it’s hard to boil that down. So I would say if it really comes down to it, I think leadership is definitely the one that has been the most difficult for me because I think – I mean, I don’t know. I think leadership is often put together as this package of people in roles, in “leadership positions,” and that’s oftentimes rewarded. There’s often momentum built around that, right? If somebody tends to be active and speak up, this tends to happen. But you really realize over time that it’s really not about that. It’s really about how do you serve the people, your constituents, your workers, your partners, your friends, your customers, and your vendors, everyone that you work with. 

Again, finding a voice of authenticity and a mission that’s so much greater than the product that you’re selling, ultimately, at the end of the day, and making sure that that’s an authentic mission and a set of value systems that really represents the people that are truly behind this company because the company really is just a journey. It’s really a journey of humans coming together, bringing their talents, introducing their networks of other talented individuals to come through. So at the end of the day, does the product really matter? Or is it really the people that come together and make it come to life? I really kind of believe that latter certainly to some extent. 

But that was a really hard thing to understand. Because I think the skills that – Again, the leadership skills that are oftentimes rewarded in a corporate setting are oftentimes selfish and ones where it’s like what are you good at. You tend to see this too with a lot of individuals that when they find themselves in conversations with senior leadership, for example, which oftentimes isn’t the case in a corporate American setting, I mean, most of the time, it’s jockeying of position of like, “This is what I’ve done. This is how I’m effective. This is what I lead.” It’s like that doesn’t really provide a lot of value in your conversation, right? 

I mean, the ultimate value, understandably, for any business is to move forward as a company because that improves everyone’s livelihood and, ultimately, your customers’ livelihood, right? So I think when you look at it in that macro, you realize it’s not about the individual. It’s about the bigger piece of like what are we all working for and realizing that the individual growth journey will actually lead to overall growth in the business. But, again, if you come from a place where you’re thinking about your specific role in that, as opposed to looking top down on how do you truly create and cultivate a culture of growth, it’s really hard to understand how to take yourself out of that and turn it the other way around and reflect all of that growth towards others, while still finding that your personal growth journey is actually felt that. 

So that was a really, really extensive journey that I’m still on, and I think there’s a lot of the people in my team and partners have been extremely patient with me through that. That I would say has been the hardest, most emotionally intelligently challenging thing and process that I think I still undergo, and I still just – I’m so in awe of people that have mastered that, and I see how they bring them to home to their families too. That’s really, I think, what keeps me excited about the growth journey in that specific way.

[00:30:14] TU: I love what you just said there, and I think you can relate to this as a relatively newer dad. But I think parenting and entrepreneurship, at least in my own journey, have really forced some of the most significant inner reflection, which can be humbling and painful sometimes in the moment of like – My kids, I love them to death. But parenting exposes every limitation I’ve ever had that I was able to hide. 

I think entrepreneurship can do the same. But I think if you lean into that, as I hear you are, it’s such a rich and rewarding journey of what are the opportunities to grow and to develop and flourish and to really think about some of these bigger questions of, sure, there’s going to be opportunity to build some wealth and create jobs and provide a really cool company and a product that’s awesome and tastes great. I can attest to that. My boys and wife can attest to that that have tried the product as well. 

But it’s bigger than that, right? It’s bigger than that, and you’re already talking about that. I think that bigger than that also enhances the product, and it makes it attractive to people that are using it and the team that is behind that. It’s energizing when you have that type of a mindset. 

[00:31:21] KY: Oh, my gosh. You hit the nail on the head. I mean, that same mentality when you apply it, to your point, I mean, having a kid, immediately put somebody significantly ahead of you in terms of priorities. That is what you have to do with entrepreneurship too, right? It’s really just not about you. It’s about the people that you serve. I think when it comes to product that you hit the nail on the head. I mean, as soon as we launched our product, we already knew that we were selling a product, and we had to find authenticity in our journey to express a brand, and that’s exactly what it was. 

It just so happened that we had – I had my daughter in that really existential brand, soul searching phase. So it actually really helped us internalize like what it meant to feel empathy for consumers in that way and build a brand that really spoke to their needs, as opposed to a brand that we wanted to express ourselves. Then finding a common ground of authenticity so that when we build everything, it feels like a true genuine expression of self, as opposed to here’s a list of factors and characteristics of this product that you should buy into. 

Sort of I think there’s a really interesting tidbit on that that I’d love to share, which is growing up in STEM, we were kind of taught to look at data and place data at a level of gospel sometimes, right? Where like the higher the end, for example, the more statistically significant, the more correct this data point ends up being. That is absolutely true, and there’s obvious logical science built into that way of discerning data. Then simultaneously, you do have occasional situations where a clinical trial may fail. Yet you have individual patients that may be cured of cancer. Does it necessarily mean that the product is not good? Or was it not tested in the right patients? I mean, you start to answer a lot of these interesting questions. 

But the reason I bring that up is because this comes back to the value system of health care, which is it’s interesting. Because within healthcare, we’re tasked to be compassionate to care for our patients, and there’s sometimes like a disconnect with the way that we think about our jobs and the way that that happens. Because when you look at datasets, you look and you’re taught to think that the higher the data set, the more accurate, the more useful this information is, almost to the point where an N of 1 becomes tossed away as meaningless. 

The irony is as we’ve built in our consumer journey, we’ve put all of our efforts into appreciating the N of 1 because the N of 1 is actually the lived journey that every single human being on this planet is born into, like every single person goes through an end of one journey. Your journey is your journey. That’s it, your perspectives, people that you’re with. I mean, that’s uniquely yours. That’s what you’re born into. That’s what you die with. The fact that that’s held out important sometimes or the importance of that, the significance of that is lost in our way of appreciating that people aren’t data points, people are people. 

If we sometimes look at that N of 1 in the context of a broader dataset and find appreciation in the outliers, you actually will find a lot more answers to those questions that you may not even know you’re asking for. That’s actually where entrepreneurship really, really has taught us is we don’t find a lot of value in our aggregated success. Aggregated success is just the status quo of what’s working. We have so much failure that there’s no real N of 1 failure that you’re looking to innovate on. 

But occasionally, we get an N of 1 that just blows our mind. How did that happen? Like where’s that coming from? Why is that happening? That insight that we get, picking up the phone, talking to that one person, can shift business strategy in ways that are so significant and unlock opportunities that we’d never considered, and it’s because we value that N of 1. I think if we look at that in health care and truly ask those questions, those deeper questions of making sure we don’t lose that context in the scheme of pursuing greater science, I think we can probably affect the holistic health of patients in a greater way as an industry. So that’s something that, again, going back full circle to your question of institutions is something that, as a value system, we should probably try to find a way to embed in our curriculum.

[00:35:30] TU: Great insights, Kun. Really have enjoyed the conversation. I’m excited to get this out to the YFP community. Where is the best place that folks can go to connect with you and to get involved perhaps in Pricklee as well?

[00:35:43] KY: Yeah, absolutely. So you can find us – For myself, personally, you can find me on LinkedIn in just Kun, K-U-N, last name Yang, Y-A-N-G. Yeah, feel free to connect and reach out if you ever want to have a conversation. We’d love to meet other pharmacists and hear about your journeys. 

Then also, it just so happens that we actually are just opening our seed investment round for Pricklee as well. So if that’s something of interest, please feel free to reach out and let us know if you have any questions or want to learn a little bit more about that opportunity as well.

[00:36:11] TU: Awesome. We’ll link to both the Pricklee site, as well as Kun’s LinkedIn profile in our show notes. Kun, thanks so much for taking time to come on the show. I appreciate it.

[00:36:19] KY: Yeah. Thanks so much for the opportunity, Tim. I had a great time. 

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:36:22] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 288: An Interview with Suze Orman (YFP Classic)


This week we replay a YFP Podcast Classic. Suze Orman, #1 New York Times bestselling author on personal finance with over 25 million books in circulation, joins Tim Ulbrich on today’s episode. They talk about her most recent book Women & Money: Be Strong, Be Smart, Be Secure and the advice Suze has for pharmacy professionals feeling overwhelmed with their student loan debt and managing their financial plan. 

About Today’s Guest

Suze Orman has been called “a force in the world of personal finance” and a “one-woman financial advice power house” by USA today. A #1 New York Times bestselling author, magazine and online columnist, writer/producer, and one of the top motivational speakers in the world today, Orman is undeniably America’s most recognized expert on personal finance.

Orman was the contributing editor to “O” The Oprah Magazine for 16 years, the Costco Connection Magazine for over 18 years, and hosted the award winning Suze Orman Show, which aired every Saturday night on CNBC for 13 years. Over her television career Suze has accomplished that which no other television personality ever has before. Not only is she the single most successful fundraiser in the history of Public Television, but she has also garnered an unprecedented eight Gracie awards, more than anyone in the entire history of this prestigious award. The Gracies recognize the nation’s best radio, television, and cable programming for, by, and about women.

In March 2013, Forbes magazine awarded Suze a spot in the top 10 on a list of the most influential celebrities of 2013. In January 2013, The Television Academy Foundation’s Archive of American Television has honored Suze’s broadcast career accomplishments with her recent inclusion in its historic Emmy TV Legends interview collection.

In 2010, Orman was also honored with the Touchstone Award from Women in Cable Telecommunications, was named one of “The World’s 100 Most Powerful Women” by Forbes and was presented with an Honorary Doctor of Commercial Science degree from Bentley University. In that same month, Orman received the Gracie Allen Tribute Award from the American Women in Radio and Television (AWRT); the Gracie Allen Tribute Award is bestowed upon an individual who truly plays a key role in laying the foundation for future generations of women in the media.

In October 2009, Orman was the recipient of a Visionary Award from the Council for Economic Education for being a champion on economic empowerment. In July 2009, Forbes named Orman 18th on their list of The Most Influential Women In Media. In May 2009, Orman was presented with an honorary degree Doctor of Humane Letters from the University of Illinois. In May 2009 and May 2008, Time Magazine named Orman as one of the TIME 100, The World’s Most Influential People. In October 2008, Orman was the recipient of the National Equality Award from the Human Rights Campaign.

In April 2008, Orman was presented with the Amelia Earhart Award for her message of financial empowerment for women. Saturday Night Live has spoofed Suze six times during 2008-2011. In 2007, Business Week named Orman one of the top ten motivational speakers in the world-she was the ONLY woman on that list, thereby making her 2007’s top female motivational speaker in the world.

Orman who grew up on the South Side of Chicago earned a bachelor’s degree in social work at the University of Illinois and at the age of 30 was still a waitress making $400 a month.

Episode Summary

Happy Holidays! This week, we bring back a YFP Podcast classic! YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, is joined by the one and only, Suze Orman. Suze, #1 New York Times bestselling personal finance author with over 25 million books in circulation, talks about her book, Women & Money: Be Strong, Be Smart, Be Secure, and shares advice for pharmacy professionals feeling overwhelmed with their student loan debt and managing their financial plan.

Suze shares her journey of being a waitress until she was 30 years old and going through a loss of $50,000 from an investment through Merryl Lynch in a three month time period. This is where her passion for personal finance began. Suze landed a job at Merryl Lynch, quickly began rising in rankings and eventually started her own firm. Suze became an advocate to ensure other people’s investments make more money than she’s earning. 

Suze says it’s important to have a healthy relationship with money and that there is no shame big enough to keep you from who you are meant to be. She shares that fear, shame and anger are the three internal obstacles to wealth. 

In regards to student loans, particularly for those with the biggest debt loads, Suze says that first and foremost you have to understand the ramifications that unpaid student loan debt will have on your life. She suggests following the standard repayment plan to minimize the additional interest and amount added on the end of loan (if following an income driven plan), and the taxes to be paid if the loan is forgiven. After paying off your student loan debt, Suze says that you can start dreaming. If an employer offers a 401(k) or 403(b) with an employer match, Suze suggests to contribute to the retirement account only up until the amount of the match. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Happy holidays. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

This week, our team at YFP is taking off an annual tradition for us, as we reflect on the year behind us, plan the year ahead, and most importantly, spend time with family and friends. Since our team is on a break this week, I’m bringing back one of our most listened to episodes of all time. That’s an episode from July 2019, where I had the pleasure of interviewing the one and only Suze Orman, a number one New York Times bestselling author on personal finance with over 25 million books in circulation. 

On the show, we talked about one of her books, Women & Money: Be Strong, Be Smart, Be Secure, and the advice she has for pharmacists, as it relates to managing their finances. Now, Suze has been called a force in the world of personal finance and a one-woman financial advice powerhouse by USA Today. She’s a number one New York Times bestselling author, magazine and online columnist, writer, producer, and one of the top motivational speakers in the world. Orman was a contributing editor to the O, The Oprah Magazine, for 16 years, the Costco Connection magazine for over 18 years, and hosted the award-winning Suze Orman Show, which aired every Saturday night on CNBC for 13 years. 

With that said, it’s without question and honor to welcome Suze Orman to the YPF Podcast. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:28] TU: Suze, before we jump in to discuss how pharmacists can be more intentional with their financial plan, I want to give a shout-out to one of our avid listeners, Amanda Copolinski, who is a super fan of yours that said, “Tim, you need to interview Suze on the podcast. Her message will resonate so well with your listeners in the financial issues that pharmacists are facing.” So while you have impacted millions of people, Amanda is one of those. Because of your work, your message will now impact thousands more in our community. So thank you so much for coming on the show.

[00:02:00] SO: You’re welcome. But, Tim, I just have to say one thing about Amanda, seriously. Amanda asked, and because she had a voice, because it is so important, particularly, that women have a voice, and they ask for what they want, and because she asked for what she wanted, even though it was for the good of all, it obviously was also good for Amanda. She got what she wanted. So if we can just learn to ask for what we want, I mean, what’s the worst thing that could happen? I say no. So then it wouldn’t have mattered if even – Do you see what I mean? So, Amanda, you go girl, you go girl, you go girl. All right, we can go now.

[00:02:41] TU: So before we jump in and talk more about your book, Women & Money: Be Strong, Be Smart, Be Secure, I’m curious and want our listeners to know as well a little bit more about your background into this world of personal finance that has led you to transform millions of people on their own financial journey. Were there a series of events or an aha moment for you that set you on this path, on this journey to teach and empower others about personal finance? 

[00:03:07] SO: Yeah. It was a very simple story, actually, where I was a waitress till I was 30 years of age in Berkeley, California. Having been a waitress for seven years, making $400 a month, to make a very long story short, I had this idea that I could open up my own restaurant because I made these people a fortune with all my ideas. My parents had absolutely no money. My mother was a secretary. My father was sick most of his life, blah, blah, blah, blah. And the customers I had been waiting on lent me $50,000 to open up my own restaurant. 

So I’m, again, making a long story short. They had me put that money in Merrill Lynch, which was a brokerage firm. I had a crooked broker. Within three months, all $50,000 was lost. Now, I didn’t know what to do, and I thought I know I can be a broker. They just make you broker. Because during those three months, I really loved starting to learn about a world that was so foreign to me. I didn’t even know what a money market was or Merrill Lynch was. 

Anyway, I went and applied for a job at Merrill Lynch because I knew I wanted to pay these people back that lent me $50,000, and I wasn’t going to do that at $400 a month, which was my salary as a waitress. They hired me to fill their women’s quota. While I was working for them, I realized what my broker did was illegal, and I also had been told that women belonged barefoot and pregnant. They had to hire me, but they would fire me in six months. So while I was working for them, I sued them with the help of somebody who worked for Merrill Lynch who told me what had happened to me was illegal. Because I sued them, they couldn’t fire me. 

During the two years until it came to court, and they then settled outside of court because I was their number six producing broker at the time, but what happened was during that time, those two years, I realized, oh, my God, how many people out there don’t have the money to lose? Like all right, I was young. I could have somehow come back. But what if it were my parents? What if it were your parents? What if it was somebody who that was every penny they had to their name? 

Even though I was a financial advisor, in terms of serving people at that time, I became an advocate to make sure that every single person that invested money, that their money meant more than the money I was going to earn off of them. I put them before me. People first, then money, then things. It was those people that mattered because I was one of those people. Before you knew it, I just rose and rose in the ranks, started my own firm, and here we are today.

[00:06:20] TU: Indeed. I think that’s a good segue into talking about your million-copy, 

number one New York Times bestselling book, Women & Money: Be Strong, Be Smart, Be Secure. As you may or may not already know, the profession of pharmacy is made up of a majority of women, approximately 60-40 split, two-thirds, one-third of graduates today, roughly speaking. So I think this message in your book is certainly going to resonate with our audience. 

You start the book with a chapter titled Imagine What’s Possible, and there’s a passage in there that I want to briefly read that really stood out to me. You said, “Women can invest, save, and handle debt just as well and skillfully as any man. I still believe that. Why would anyone think differently? So imagine my surprise when I learned that some of the people closest to me in my life were in the dark about their own finances. Clueless or, in some cases, willfully resisting, doing what they knew needed to be done. I’m talking about smart, competent, accomplished women who present a face to the world that is pure confidence and capability.” 

So why, Suze, is this topic of personal finance, even for well, smart, accomplished women, such as the pharmacists listening, and heck, regardless of gender, I would say this is true. Really smart people that often can’t effectively manage their money. What are the root causes for them?

[00:07:42] SO: Yeah. You just used the word can’t. Oh, they can. Women have more talent in their little fingers, I’m so sorry to say, more capability than most men have in both hands, really. I don’t say that as a put-down to men. It’s just that women hold up the entire sky here in the United States. They take care of their parents, their children, their spouse, their brothers, their sisters, their employees, their clients, their patients, everybody, their pets, their plants. When it’s all said and done, when they’re 50 or 60 years of age, that’s when, for the very first time, they start to think about themselves. 

You have got to remember that women have the ability to give birth, in most cases. They have the ability to feed that which they have given birth to, in most cases. So a woman’s nature is to nurture, is to take care of everybody else before she takes care of herself. So it’s not that she can’t. It’s she doesn’t want to. She doesn’t want to. She wants to make sure that her kids, in particular – A woman will do anything to make sure that her children are fine. That is not true with men. That is not true with men. 

I used to think that it was until 2008 came along and when people were laid off of their jobs. They lost their home. They lost their retirement. They lost everything. Women would go back to work, working three or four jobs, a waitress, a cocktail waitress, anything, just to put food on the table. A man, if they had a $200,000 job, would not go back to work if all they were offered was $60,000. They weren’t going to do it. 

Again, it’s not putting men down. Please, men, don’t think that because I don’t put you down. It’s the socialization effect of the difference between a man and a woman. So a woman just will do it all, but she won’t take care of herself. She chooses not to. In any aspect, she’ll only take care of her household expenses. You know why? Because her house holds everybody that she loves. That’s the only difference. That’s the only difference, boyfriend. That’s the only difference.

[00:10:06] TU: Which is a good segue to talk about healthy relationships with money because in the book, you mention that in order to build a healthy relationship with money, there are attitudes that women need to get rid of, with the first of these being these weights or burdens that you referenced that are commonly carried around, one being the burden of shame and the second being the tendency of blame. Can you tell us more about this concept of blame?

[00:10:29] SO: Yep. You know, in the book, I talk about truthfully that there is no blame big enough or shame big enough to keep you who you are meant from being. There just isn’t. Sometimes, we’re ashamed that we don’t know about money. Sometimes, we’re ashamed that we don’t have the money that we need to be able to give our children what they want. 

Now, what I just said was very heavy, believe it or not, because it’s really difficult. I mean, I just experienced it. I had my niece here. In fact, I had all my nieces here, but one in particular that has a five-year-old child who loves Pluto more than life itself. He literally thinks Pluto is alive. He said to me, “Aunt Suze, how do I get a real Pluto?” I mean, “You mean a dog?” He said, “No, really. I want this Pluto to be alive.” You could just see, you want to give this kid anything this kid wants because he’s so fabulous. Not that – All your kids are fabulous, to you, anyway. 

So a mother feels, especially if she’s a single mother, that she has to make up for the loss of a father figure or another mother figure or parent figure, and she does it usually by purchasing things for her kids because when they go to school, oh, but this kid has this cute backpack, and this kid has this, and look at these watches, and look at this iPhone. So it becomes very interesting that a lot of times, you’re ashamed of what you yourself don’t have. You’re not proud that you have anything. You’re ashamed of what you don’t have, and you blame it, usually, on somebody else. Or you blame it on yourself. 

It’s – Fear, shame, and anger are the three internal obstacles to wealth. They just are. I have people – I know you’re talking about the book right now, but my true love at this moment in time is the Women & Money podcast because it’s on the Women & Money podcast that you can hear. You can hear via the emails that are sent in the shame and the blame that women feel, the anger that they have at themselves for staying in a relationship that they don’t want to be in, but they don’t have the money to leave, the confusion that’s out there. A lot of these women are so powerless because they’re not powerful over their own money.

[00:13:10] TU: In the book, you go through a detailed financial empowerment plan, which I think is incredibly helpful for our listeners to hear more about since we know many pharmacists are struggling with spinning their wheels financially, graduating now with more than six figures of student loan debt, the average about $166,000, having many competing financial priorities with home buying, starting up a family, building up reserves, saving up for retirement. The list goes on and on. So the question is where does one start when they are looking at so many competing financial priorities, and it can feel so overwhelming?

[00:13:42] SO: You start by, number one, really understanding the ramifications that student loan debt that goes unpaid will have on your life forever. So your number one, bar none, is your student loan debt, and you have got to understand the difference between paying back student loan debt on the standard repayment method and the income-based repayment methods. You have to understand that in your head, if you think, “Oh, I have all this debt. I’m just going to pay back a little bit because I don’t have that much of an income, and they’re going to forgive it in 20 or 25 years. I’ll be OK,” no, you won’t. 

You won’t because if under the standard repayment method, your monthly payment should be $1,500 a month, and under income-based repayment, you’re only $750 a month, that $750 difference gets added onto the back end of your loan, plus interest. When they forgive it, when a debt is forgiven, you need to pay taxes on that, as if it were ordinary income. It is possible that if you do that over 20 years, you’re going to end up owing more than you even started with that they’re going to forgive.

So you have to be realistic here. If you’re going to go in this industry, if you’re going to become a vet, if you’re going to become anything with massive student loan debt, then you have to put your priorities in place. Your first priority is your student loan. After your student loan, hopefully, on the standard repayment method, it is paid off, then start dreaming. Ten years isn’t that big of a deal. It will come, and it will go. But don’t try to do it all at once.

[00:15:45] TU: Yeah. That’s really timely. I know for many pharmacists that are listening to this, they’re looking at, as I mentioned, six figures of student loan debt, $160,000, $170,000, $200,000 of loan, unsubsidized many of those, interest rates that are at six to eight percent. So obviously, those interest rates and the growing interest and the baby interest can have an incredible negative impact on their financial plan. 

That being a good segue, I think, into the conversation about loan forgiveness, which has gotten a lot of attention with the upcoming presidential elections, and we’ve had some discussion with Bernie Sanders, Elizabeth Warren, have forgiveness plans that are out there. Not even getting into specific candidates or politics or the individual policies, I think it brings up an interesting discussion around loan forgiveness and the positives and benefits of that, relative to what people learn through the process of paying off student loans. 

I know, for me, individually, going through the process of paying off more than $200,000 of student loan debt, there was a lot I learned and that my wife and I learned through that lesson in terms of budgeting, working together, setting goals. But I also understand that for many, and certainly would have been the case for us as well, not having that debt would have been fantastic. So how do we reconcile forgiveness relative to being able to learn through that process?

[00:16:58] SO: First of all, let’s talk about student loan debt to begin with and the viability of it. Is everybody crazy that we should have to pay, our children should have to pay $200,000 for a college education?

[00:17:13] TU: Amen.

[00:17:14] SO: Like is that, just to begin with, the sickest thing you have ever heard in your life? So while everybody’s dealing with the debt that we have, what we also should be dealing with is why are we paying that kind of money? Listen, if that’s what these financial institutions need to keep the buildings and the teachers and everything going, maybe we need to go to online universities that are fully credited that everything is done online because the burden that these kids are leaving school with is so heavy. It is the number one question that I am asked. What is so sad, it is the number one question that I do not really have an answer for because they will not let you discharge it in bankruptcy. They do not –

I mean, it is crazy that you pay the same amount of money to get a master’s in social work as you do an MBA. Really? So tuitions, number one, should be based on the area that you are specializing in. Hey, if you’re going to graduate and you’re going to make $200,000, $400,000, $500,000 a year, fine. Then you start spending money that then subsidizes those that are going to make $30,000 a year because they want to be a teacher. Or whatever it may be. But I do think what’s going to start to happen is that people are going to have to start going to community colleges for the first two years or so, and then probably switch over. But then, you have to be crazy if you go to a school that’s $50,000 a year. 

Now, with that said, I get when you want to be a vet, when you want to be a pharmacist, when you want to be a doctor. That’s what they charge. So if you know, if you know beforehand that that’s what it’s going to cost you, and you have an unsubsidized loan, which means that it is growing while you are in school, can you at least pay the interest on that loan while you’re in school? 

I know everybody’s going to say, “But, Suze, I’m working full-time at school. I can’t.” Oh, yes, you can. I had to put myself through school. I worked until 2:00 AM every morning. I started at 7:00. I worked seven days a week for four years straight. Don’t you dare tell Suze Orman you can’t do it. You most certainly can. You just don’t want to. When you have debt that you can’t pay back, this is not a choice if you can or you can’t, if you want to or you don’t want to. You have to, and it’s – I don’t mean to sound harsh to you, but you’ll thank me years from now that at least you haven’t accumulated an interest rate on top of everything else.

[00:20:02] TU: Suze, one of the most common questions that I get and I’m sure you get all the time as well is how do I balance paying off my student loan debt relative to investing and saving for the future? As we think about pharmacy professionals specifically, many of them have gone through lots of education to get where they are. They may have four years of undergrad. They have four years – Likely, some people more in terms of getting their doctorate degree. They may go on and do residency training. 

So here they are, and they look at the clock and say, “Yes, I’m young. But I also know I need to aggressively save, and I keep hearing the message of I need to be putting away money for the future. But I’ve got $160,000, $180,000, $200,000 of student loan debt, unsubsidized loans, six to eight percent. So how do I balance the two of these?” What advice do you give people to help them think through that?

[00:20:48] SO: I would not not pay a student loan under the standard repayment method in order to then save in a retirement account. Obviously, if you work for a corporation that gives you a 401(k) or a 403(b) or whatever it may be, and it matches your contribution, then you have absolutely no choice whatsoever but to absolutely at least invest up to the point of the match. After that, your very first bill that has to be paid before you can decide anything is your student loan repayment. 

After you know what it’s going to cost you to pay on your student loan, then you have to make a decision. Oh, do I have to move in with six or seven kids and all live together in order just to do whatever? What do I have to do after that payment? Is there any money left over? If there is, what will it allow me to do? It may only allow you, I know you’re going to really think I’ve lost it, to move back in with your parents for a number of years.

[00:21:53] TU: You’ve got to do what you’ve got to do.

[00:21:54] SO: You’ve got to do what you’ve got to do. For all of us to make it in today’s society, we have to either really enhance the nuclear unit and nuclear family, and really help each other. Or if we can’t do what we’re born into, then create our own nuclear family, whereas five or six of you get together and you go, “Okay, we have this problem.” It’s not like communal living, but it’s how do we solve this problem? So rather than you each have your own individual apartment, you each have your own car, you each have all of this stuff, what can you do as a group of people? Uber and Lyft and Zipcars, all of that came, especially Zipcars, about people who couldn’t afford to have their own car. 

Again, I don’t mean to be Suze Smackdown here. But I do want you just to be realistic about your life and the independence dream, living on your own, having all of these things. Nothing will give you more pleasure than having money versus things.

[00:23:08] TU: Yeah. My wife and I talk often, as we think about our own financial situations, that we felt some of that pressure in our mid-20s of wanting to live up to the lifestyle that our parents have gotten to after 30 or 40 years. So I think really reshifting expectations and thinking about specifically today’s pharmacy graduates just really has to be intentional with their financial plan and change some of those expectations to set them up to be successful in the long run. 

Shifting gears a little bit, I want to talk about planning for the future, and we recently had on the show Cameron Huddleston, author of the book, Mom and Dad: How to Have Essential Conversations with Your Parents About Their Finances, an excellent book that has me thinking more and more about the significance and importance of healthy and open financial conversations with family about money and ensuring that the estate planning process is well thought out and is in place. 

I noticed that you offer a protection portfolio that is meant to help people take the worry out of protecting themselves, their assets, and their family. So tell us a little bit more about why this process of having a protection portfolio in place is so important and what information is compiled in a portfolio like this.

[00:24:19] SO: What’s really important is for everybody to understand that we have no control over the things that happen to us. Are we going to be in an accident? I mean, really, just the other day, Tim, you know I live on a private island, and I’m driving down this road. I mean, there are no cars on this private island. There are only golf carts. There were only like – There’s 80 homes. There’s nobody here most of the time. I’m driving back to my house, and I come up on a golf cart that overturned on these four 20-year-olds, and they were seriously hurt, all right? I mean, five minutes before then, they were on this private island, having a fabulous time. Now, I’m like, “Oh, my God.” 

So anything can happen at any time, and every one of you needs to be protected against the what ifs of life. May you always hope for the best, but may you plan for the worst, whether it’s an accident, an illness, an early death, whatever it may be. The number of emails I get from 40-year-old women, 50-year-old women, 30-year-old women saying, “Suze, my spouse died. I have three kids. I never expected to be in this situation.” They go on and on and on about it. 

This is also, what I’m about to tell you, very important if you have parents. Because if you have parents, the question becomes like – My mom lived till she was 97. If something happens to your parents, they lose their mind, so to speak, they have dementia, they have Alzheimer’s, and they can’t write their checks anymore or pay their bills, who’s going to take care of them? You can’t do anything for them, unless you have what I call the must-have documents. Not only a will, a living revocable trust, an advanced directive, and a durable power of attorney for healthcare. You must have those. 

But most of the time, lawyers tell you, “All you need is a will.” Oh, give me a break. The less money you have, the more you need a living revocable trust because wills make it so that in most cases, if you own a piece of real estate or whatever it may be, your estate has to go through probate. Guess who gets the probate fees? The lawyer that told you all you need is a will. So a living revocable trust not only passes your assets from one person to another within a two-week period of time, no fees, nothing. But in case of an incapacity, it will say you can sign for so-and-so. So-and-so can sign for you. It sets up your estate every way you want it, and it also helps you because minors cannot inherit money. 

So if you have young children, and both you and your spouse are killed in a car crash, something happens, the money can’t go to your minors. If you left your money to them via your will, good luck. It’s going to end up in a blocked account until they’re 18. So with that said, most trusts, if you go to see a trust lawyer, first of all, you have to know there are good trust lawyers. Most of them are not, are at least $2,500. Every time you make a change, $500, $1,000, you’re just sitting here talking to me about you don’t have even have enough money to pay your student loan debt. Where are you going to get $2,500 to do a will, a trust, an advanced directive, a durable power of attorney for healthcare? Every time you need to make a change, where are you going to get the money to do that? 

So years ago, with my own trust lawyer, I created what’s called the must-have documents. These documents are my documents. If you were to look at my trust, my will, everything, you would see these. But I wanted to do it at a price that every single person could afford. So we created over $2,500 worth of state-of-the-art documents for approximately $69. What’s great about these documents, not only are they fabulous. Every time the law changes, they automatically get updated, but you can change it as many times as you want. 

So if you go from one kid to two kids, you go back to your computer, you change them. So you never have to pay for it again. If you’re interested, really, in that offer, you can just go to suzeorman.com/offer. Through there, it’s $69. Otherwise, you’ll see it sold for $100, $90. They’re sold for all over the place. But these documents have changed the lives of millions and millions and millions of people over the years.

[00:29:28] TU: Yeah. I think it’s also important for our listeners just to consider the peace of mind of having all of this together. When you think about all of the things that are found in estate planning documents, and my wife and I went through this process we’ve talked about on the podcast before, where you put together insurance policy information and where your accounts are at and birth certificates and all of the papers that would need to be readily accessible, in addition to all of your estate planning documents. To get there and the conversations you have and the peace of mind it provides is incredible. Again, suzeorman.com/offer will get you there. 

Suze, I want to wrap up our time together by talking about legacy, and I’m fascinated with learning more about what drives very successful, highly influential individuals such as yourself to take on the life’s mission and work that they do. So for you, as you look back on a career that is undeniably wildly successful and that has positively transformed the lives of millions of people, what is the legacy that you’re leaving?

[00:30:31] SO: I hope the legacy that I leave is that women in particular, but men as well, but women in particular really know that they are more capable than they have any idea, that they will never be powerful in life until they’re powerful over their own money, how they think about it, how they feel about it, and how they invest it, and that every one of them, one of them, has what it takes to be more and to have more. They just have to want to. 

I don’t really know. I don’t know how to answer that because I never think about what I’m going to leave. I only really think about what I’m doing. I can tell you right now, like one of my friends said to me, “You just can’t help yourself, can you, Suze Orman?” So with the Women & Money podcast, people write in their emails. I keep saying, “I’m not going to answer them. I can’t answer all these emails.” Now, I’ve answered almost every one, except four. I’ve got four left, and then they’ll mount up again, and blah, blah, blah, blah. 

But I have such a desire for every single woman and the men smart enough to listen, but really for every single woman to get the right advice, the best advice, to start to educate them so that they become smart enough, strong enough, secure enough. So they can start educating their daughters and their sisters and their aunts and their moms and their grandmas and everybody. So that we start really teaching one another because I’m just so afraid of where this world – Truthfully, the hatred in this world that we are experiencing right now, I am very afraid of where it’s going to take us next year. So I hope I leave a legacy of love and power. That’s what I really hope I leave.

[00:32:45] TU: Yeah. What really stands out to me, Suze, the work that you’re doing, and you alluded to this, is the generational impact that it’s having, and that will forever go on. I mean, that’s an amazing thing, when you think about transforming somebody’s personal financial life. Let’s say they’re a mother, and they pass it on to their kids and their friends and their cousins and their network, and that gets passed on to another generation. That is incredible transformational work that will forever have impact. So I thank you for that work, and I know it’s had an impact here on me in even having the opportunity to talk with you today. 

To our listeners, as Suze mentioned, she responds to her requests as it relates to the podcast that she has each and every week, the Suze Orman’s Women & Money podcast. So if you have a question for Suze that we did not touch on during today’s show, make sure to reach out at [email protected]

Again, as a reminder, make sure to head on over to suzeorman.com, S-U-Z-E-O-R-M-A-N.com, where you can learn more about Suze, including her blog, the podcast, comprehensive resources, live events that she hosts, and books and products that are designed to help empower you in your own financial plan. 

Suze, again, thank you so much for coming on the show, and I’m grateful for what you were able to share and the impact that it will have on our community. Thank you very much.

[00:34:04] SO: Anytime, boyfriend. Anytime.

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:34:07] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 287: Monetizing Your Clinical Expertise with Dr. Timothy Gauthier


Timothy Gauthier, antimicrobial stewardship pharmacist and pharmacy entrepreneur, discusses the genesis of IDStewardship.com and LearnAntibiotics.com, how he has monetized his clinical expertise to create passive revenue streams, and how he balances the demands of entrepreneurship with his personal and professional commitments. 

About Today’s Guest

Timothy P. Gauthier, Pharm.D., BCPS, BCIDP is a pharmacist trained in infectious diseases and antimicrobial stewardship. He is a clinician, researcher, educator, and author. He is an advocate for antimicrobial stewardship and pharmacy education.

Dr. Gauthier graduated from Northeastern University’s School of Pharmacy (Boston, MA) in 2008. He then completed a Post-Graduate Year-1 Pharmacy Practice Residency and a Post-Graduate Year-2 Infectious Diseases Pharmacy Residency at Jackson Memorial Hospital (Miami, FL). Since finishing terminal training he has worked in academia (Nova Southeastern University, 2010-2015), clinical practice (Miami Veterans Affairs Healthcare System, 2015-2019), and a leadership role (Baptist Health South Florida, 2019-current), all focusing on advancing the fields of infectious diseases pharmacy and antimicrobial stewardship.

He holds certifications from the Board of Pharmacy Specialties for Pharmacotherapy and Infectious diseases. He has completed the Making A Difference in Infectious Diseases Pharmacotherapy Antimicrobial Stewardship Training Program.

He is the creator and editor-in-chief of www.IDstewardship.com, www.LearnAntibiotics.com, and the many @IDstewardship social media profiles. He co-hosts the #ASPchat each month on Twitter. He reaches thousands of people each day on the internet and on social media, where he aims share reliable and relevant information from the world of pharmacy and healthcare in general. IDstewardship.com alone has registered over 5,00,000 page views as of November 2022. He is also the author of the recently released book “Learn Antibiotics” which is now available for sale on Amazon.

Episode Summary

This week on the YFP Podcast, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, welcomes antimicrobial stewardship pharmacist and fellow pharmacy entrepreneur, Tim Gauthier. Tim is the creator of IDStewarship.com and LearnAntibiotics.com. During the show, Tim and Tim discuss the genesis for creating these two learning platforms, how Tim has monetized his clinical experience to create passive streams of income, and how he manages to stay consistent in entrepreneurship while balancing a full-time pharmacy career and fulfilling personal life. Listeners will hear about Tim’s pathway to pharmacy, what drew him into the profession, his passion for infectious disease pharmacy, and what he was hoping to accomplish with his learning platforms, IDStwardship.com and LearnAntibiotics.com. Tim walks us through the content and resources available on his websites and how he has monetized them while providing a wealth of free content to his community. Making things passive and generating passive revenue streams is crucial to Tim, and he shares the tools and systems he has put in place to make that goal possible while balancing other obligations. Tim also discusses the incredible value of community and how he has built an active, engaged pharmacists community that contributes to the platforms in multiple ways. Tim closes with advice for pharmacists looking to follow a similar path in monetizing their clinical expertise.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] T. ULBRICH: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

This week, I had a chance to welcome antimicrobial stewardship pharmacist and fellow pharmacy entrepreneur, Tim Gauthier. Tim is the creator of IDStewardship.com and LearnAntibiotics.com. During the show, Tim and I talk about the genesis for creating these two learning platforms, how Tim has monetized his clinical expertise, and how he manages and leverages his time to be able to consistently put out good content while working full-time and fulfilling his personal commitments and goals.

Before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one-on-one with more than 250 households in 40-plus states. YFP Planning offers fee-only high-touch financial planning that is customized for the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one-on-one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. 

All right, let’s jump into my interview with pharmacist and entrepreneur, Tim Gauthier. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:21] T. ULBRICH: Tim, welcome to the show.

[00:01:23] T. GAUTHIER: Hey, thanks for having me. I’m really excited to be here. How are you, Tim?

[00:01:26] T. ULBRICH: I’m well. I’m excited to dig into the work that you’re doing and for you to share with the YFP community how you’ve been monetizing your clinical expertise. But before we jump into that, I’d love to learn about your journey into pharmacy school, into the profession, where you went to school, when you graduated, and what drew you into the profession of pharmacy.

[00:01:44] T. GAUTHIER: Oh, yeah, of course. So I went to Northeastern University in Boston, Massachusetts and graduated in 2008, which feels like yesterday, but it’s been four years now. I got into pharmacy because I really was interested in microbiology. It turns out it’s easier to transfer into microbiology from pharmacy than pharmacy to microbiology. So I started in pharmacy. I ended up sticking with it. I never thought I’d go into infectious diseases pharmacy, just because it didn’t really cross my mind, and I didn’t know much about that early in my years. 

Then later on, after PGY1, I had the opportunity to do a PGY2 in ID. Lo and behold, today, I’m an infectious diseases-obsessed pharmacist, who’s out there to defend antibiotics and promote clinical pharmacy. So here we are today.

[00:02:27] T. ULBRICH: So the Northeast, Tim, to Florida. This is the time of year in the Northeast. I grew up in the Buffalo area, where it’s beautiful. I always say six months out of the year, I’d live anywhere else. But the Midwest I’m at now or the Northeast. But the other six months, included this time of year, is absolutely gorgeous. So do you miss the seasons at all?

[00:02:49] T. GAUTHIER: I do miss the seasons, but the winter in Miami, Florida, where I live now, is just absolutely wonderful. I love the culture, as well as all the different types of food here. We do visit. Periodically, I go to Boston, Rhode Island, Connecticut and stuff. So it’s nice to be able to have a little bit of the best of both worlds.

[00:03:06] T. ULBRICH: Yeah, yeah. So we connected several years back, and I’ve been following your work for some time. I wanted to bring you out in the show, as I think what you’ve built is a really cool example of how pharmacists can monetize their clinical expertise. Certainly, as we’ll talk about, it’s not just about the money, but it’s being able to leverage the skills, the passion, the interest that you have to fill a gap in the market and to help people looking to learn more about a topic. 

Here, we’re going to be talking about infectious disease, of course, and we have featured a variety of individuals on the podcasts over the past year or so. So I’m excited to share your journey as well. So let’s start with IDStewardship.com. When and why did you start it? Who was it for? What were you hoping to accomplish? 

[00:03:49] T. GAUTHIER: Yeah. So IDStewardship.com has been alive since about 2016, and I just had a friend who knew how to build websites, and I wanted to build something on my own, and he offered to help and put it together. Then I kind of took off from there, and I do pretty much everything on my own now. When I have a technical problem, he comes in? But why did I do it? There’s a couple of reasons. 

One is I wanted to own my own space on the Internet, where I could have a voice, where I could publish things and not be restricted by a company or a manager or a group of people. Also, I just really enjoy your writing. So it gave me an opportunity to use a different part of my brain on the weekends and in the evening hours to share information that could be open access and someone else could benefit from. There’s a huge need in pharmacy. It has been for us to share our experiences and practical advice and insights so that others can learn and grow from it. 

Also, just sharing information about antibiotics to make it easier for people to understand what drugs can I use for MRSA or Pseudomonas. But then some deeper things like what are five things to know about, I don’t know, Stenotrophomonas or Acinetobacter. So really, it’s just a myriad of content these days. If you’re a pharmacy professional, if you’re a healthcare professional, there’s some stuff on there that you’ll be interested in. If you’re just looking for fun stuff, there’s a drug name emoji that people really, really seem to enjoy. 

[00:05:03] T. ULBRICH: So I’m trying to understand, Tim, the need you’re filling with this resource. So obviously, we all went through ID curriculums in our PharmD program. There are there are PGY2 residencies that focus on this fellowships who focus on this. Certainly, there are associations or interest groups within associations that focus on this. So what is different here that you’re trying to carve out to fill a need that you felt like either wasn’t being met for you or for other clinicians through those other learning pathways?

[00:05:32] T. GAUTHIER: Yeah. I didn’t do very well in ID in pharmacy school, ironically, and I didn’t feel comfortable with it until I was like halfway through my PGY2. Practical resources that are available that are insightful and that consider the things that are beyond just the obvious, those were lacking. That really motivated me to try to put out things that were interesting. But also, like when you go to practice, these are five things you need to know about [inaudible 00:05:55] come across [inaudible 00:05:57]. I think that the community has received it really well, but I use social media to amplify that voice in different social media platforms. 

So it’s been a really rewarding experience, and collaborating with others from around the world has been something an area of success, I think, to be part of kind of the community that I’ve built. But I have a lot of flexibility, and that’s one thing that a lot of organizations don’t have.

[00:06:21] T. ULBRICH: Yes, yeah. The digestible nature of the content strikes me. You’ve alluded to it a couple of times with examples you’ve given thus far in the show. It reminds me of one of the pharmacist we’ve had on this show, Kelley Carlstrom, on episode 217. Her business called KelleyCPharmD. She does an awesome job of this in the pharmacy space, specifically in oncology practice, making it accessible, no matter where you are. She trained at the Cleveland Clinic, an internationally recognized institution. Not everyone can go do your residency there, right? Has the time to commit, potentially has to travel to do that. 

Her vision really is what about all the other hospitals? What about all the rural healthcare settings that are trying to treat patients and get their clinical staff up to speed? Or perhaps different practice models that don’t have a lineup of board certified residency trained pharmacists with multiple credentials? How can we expand the accessibility of this content? That’s one of things I love about what you’re doing here, and it really does strike me as being much more accessible than what is out there and some more traditional training programs or those that are offered by other groups. 

It’s also written and presented in a way that is easy to understand. It’s relevant. It’s things that, Tim, you’re experiencing daily as a clinician yourself or encounters when you’re precepting residents or students. So you know the pain points. You know the questions, the problems, the points of confusion because you’re living them each day. I love the platform of what you built to address that. 

So take us, Tim, through IDStewardship.com, in terms of the content you have, the resources you offer, and how you’ve been able to monetize it, right? You give out a lot of great content for free. But you also been able to monetize the site and enable to reap some of the fruit for all the work that you’re putting in, and you’ve put in over the last seven years. So talk to us about what you offer and provide on the site and how you’ve been able to monetize that.

[00:08:14] T. GAUTHIER: Yeah. I offered way too much stuff for free, probably. But exactly like an altruistic passion project, it has to make some kind of money for my wife to allow me to continue it. So definitely, it’s a mixed bag. But the art of the IDStewardship.com offers articles, which are blog articles talking about the student experience, the pharmacist experience, clinical insights into common questions that we ask and that we see. Those are always written by content experts who have practical experience in the area, and I vet all that content to make sure it’s reliable, credible, and it goes beyond like the obvious content that you might find in a general article. 

Also, there’s a study guide section, which is free and open access that has a picture of the drug, some of my key points, which I think you might find on your pharmacy school exams or maybe the BCPS or BCIDP exam and then links to some of the articles or some of the guidelines that are really relevant to that drug. I have a list of resources, which is pretty cool. If you’re looking for anything about antibiotics, that is a very robust list of resources. So like hepatitis C screening for Child-Pugh score. There’s a calculator in there. Just pick one random example. Or even if you’re looking for regulatory content from the Joint Commission, it’s linked there. 

I also have the contributor section, where you can see who’s participated, and there’s really a lot of contributors to my website. So I do want to emphasize that that’s a really cool part of what I’ve been able to do, and it’s not just Tim doing it. It’s the community. But I kind of lead it because I’m kind of like the editor in chief of the content founder. The other part, though, which I really want to talk about for a second is LearnAntibiotics.com. So I’ve taken the opportunity to show people that, yes, these are articles that are available. But I’ve been able to produce content that you can use for learning. As a background in academia, I know that you have to go and be able to identify and define before you can analyze and assess and predict. 

So I’ve built content specifically to help people through that learning process. If you’re looking to identify and define, I have cheat sheets on different disease states, on different drug classes. Those can help people to say, okay, like, “Pseudomonas drugs, these are my drugs.” But then I also make more fun content that has like a word search or a Jeopardy game. Those can be applied to the specific area. Then the practice tests I’ve built so that if you are able to pass that practice test, you can practice pretty competently as a pharmacist and know what questions to ask for infectious diseases and even some of them I’ll give you. Here’s the question, here’s the answer, and here’s the rationale for why each answer is right, and each answer is wrong. So it’s pretty robust. 

[00:10:59] T. ULBRICH: I love that and I want to come back in a little bit to talk more about the LearnAntibiotics.com, in terms of what you’re trying to accomplish there. I think that’s going to give some folks some interesting ideas about as you’re considering monetizing your clinical expertise, there’s a lot of different ways to do that. I love what you’ve built there with that membership type of model. 

Two words, Tim, that really stand out about what you’ve built and the vision that you have going forward are passion and community. You mentioned community just a moment ago, and I love that you’ve brought together a group of people that are, obviously, passionate about learning more about antimicrobial stewardship, learning more about infectious disease, bringing in contributors to the site, taking them from just a passive learner, to engaging them in the conversation, contributing to the community, and then passion. Your passion for this topic and furthering individuals’ knowledge and, obviously, the more our healthcare professionals know about this topic, the better they’re able to serve their patients. 

I think this is so important for folks to hear, when you’re working on a side hustle or a business, especially when you’re working a full-time job, you have lots of other commitments, doing something that you’re passionate about, you mentioned that I probably got too much free content out there, right? It’s a passion project for you. Yes, you’re monetizing it. But that is going to really drive the energy and the enthusiasm to continue to build, especially in the early years, as someone who’s trying to get something off the ground. 

Tim, as people go to IDStewardship.com and they see what you’ve built over several years, how much of this is what you have built and maintained? And how much of this is what you have other people that are helping you in building and maintaining the site?

[00:12:36] T. GAUTHIER: That’s a great question, and it’s definitely changed over time. When I started to look at developing a website, I talked to one of my friends who’s in website development, and he said, “Tim, we can do a website. But this is not a six-month thing, and this is not a one-year thing. This is like a 10-year journey, and you have to think of it very long-term.” So taking small bites has been one of the keys to success. As I’ve understood the workflows on developing different items, it’s gotten to be more efficient over time. I do produce actually the majority of the content on my own when it comes to the background work. 

But the one thing that people send to the community of pharmacists, they’re willing to be a part of this journey. Them sending me articles and communicating with me and offering their assistance and trying to get their message out and share their passion, that really has enabled me to produce more content and put more information out there. But it is a tremendous amount of work. I do spend a lot of time between the hours of 8:00 PM and 11:00 PM working on this type of stuff. I think if you don’t have the passion for it, it’s probably going to be hard to do it long term. 

But that’s what drives me because I just really am totally obsessed with infectious diseases and microbial stewardship, and I think people need help learning. I needed a lot of help learning. I see where there’s benefit. I see where there’s value. There’s some monetary benefit that comes with it. It’s not anything that’s extreme by any means. But by having that win-win, it’s really been something that I think has been worth pursuing. 

One of the secrets that they say is not to do things alone, right? If you’re going to build a program like this, or you’re going to build a side business. I have mixed feelings about that. On one hand, I love the freedom that I have. I have total creative freedom to do whatever I want, whenever I want, with no one arguing with me. But at the same time, being in an echo chamber with yourself is not always a positive thing, and having a partner can push you in good directions. So I think partnerships are important, and you can choose to pursue things as a partnership or as an individual.

Something else I want to note that as I built out what I have online with IDStewardship is I’ve really purposely tried to make it about the brand and not about me. That kind of protects me in a way because the voice is the voice of the brand and not the voice of the individual. Also, people can engage within behind that brand and be a part of the community again, rather than it being part of what Tim is doing. So that was actually very strategic in the development. 

[00:15:02] T. ULBRICH: Yeah, Tim. I think that’s a strategic move for the reason you mentioned also. I think about the passion and the mission of what you’re trying to do. Like there may be a day where maybe this isn’t only Tim who’s doing this. Or for whatever reason, you have others that are involved in the mission of advancing the education around IDStewardship and being able to have this information accessible, where folks can learn and perhaps be excited about learning it I think transcends just one person, right? So I think the contributors is another important aspect here of what you’ve highlighted.

[00:15:34] T. GAUTHIER: Like making things passive is also really important to me. I’ve learned that a lot during COVID because COVID has been absolutely horrible for all infectious diseases pharmacists and time management and when life was balanced. I mean, everybody in general. But I mean, trying to keep up with the literature and be engaged, on top of having this site and stuff going on, I need things to be able to put on pause, right? If I have no commitments that I’ve made, that’s not going to serve me well in the long term. So I really try to do things that are passive whenever possible and then only commit to like a couple of things at a time.

[00:16:05] T. ULBRICH: Yeah. One other thing I was thinking about, Tim, as I was looking at your site, that would be I think good advice for folks that are thinking about building their own, especially if they don’t have a huge budget upfront to be able to hire a web developer. If you’re building a content-based site, it could be blog articles that you’re adding, podcasts that you’re adding, e-resources that you’re adding checklists, guides, e-books, whatever, like you want to make sure you’re building it in a way that you understand and can add to it on a regular basis. 

So even if you’re working with a developer or a contractor to help you, making sure you have enough understanding of the back end so that you’re not spending a whole lot of money long-term or frustrated that each time you’re trying to add a piece of content to the site, whether that’s a blog, podcast, an opt-in guide, whatever be the case, that you want to be able to have something that’s nimble, and you can add to over time. 

[00:16:51] T. GAUTHIER: I’ve seen some people who built 20,000, 25,000-dollar websites, and they tend to be the people that follow a lot of podcasters in the space of like social media and engagement and business development. So I think if you’re committed to it, it can be worth the money. But you got to proceed with caution.

[00:17:10] T. ULBRICH: When I go to the site, Tim, and you mentioned already that LearnAantibiotics.com, www.learnantibiotics.com, we’ll link to that in the show notes, which takes you over to the IDStewardship site, that really is the membership portion of the site, where folks can be engaging with the community on an ongoing basis. Obviously, the goal there is that becomes some stability of recurring revenue that supports a lot of the time and effort and the free content that you’re putting out there. 

Talk to us about – I think in content marketing, and I hesitate to use that word because I feel like you’re leading with such good passion and education that sometimes that word can sound dirty. But ultimately, the value that you’re providing and really good free rich education is naturally going to make people aware of what you’re doing on the membership side, which has a recurring revenue potential. 

So what has your strategy or approach been to connect the free content with the membership model? Is it just that, hey, more eyeballs on the site and value that they’ll kind of find their way over there? Is it opt-ins that then point people to that resource? Tell us more about the strategy that you’ve employed to connect the free education people are viewing and receiving with some of the paid options you have. 

[00:18:24] T. GAUTHIER: For sure. As you’re saying, this, I’m thinking about how I need to be more strategic. Sometimes, just go with the flow. That feels good. That feels good. Sometimes, I think of things, and I’m like, “Oh, I wish I had done that.” Even right now, there’s a list of things that if I had the time in my life to do, I would totally do. 

But in general, what I try to do is capture a large audience and engage a large audience and do that through all these different ways that I think of, whether it’s something that’s like a clickable link on an Instagram story, or it’s a new blog post that I put out, or it’s putting a meme out there or just sharing like, “Hey, here’s like a part of my cheat sheet. If you’d like to see more of it like, shoot me your email address. I’ll shoot you a copy of this cheat sheet in full.” Then I have a way to communicate with those individuals. So if you’re just interested in the LearnAntibotics site or you’re interested in like all of IDStewardship, and you want to get our monthly newsletter, I’m able to reach you that way.

Another thing that’s important about having a mail listing is that if like tomorrow, Instagram decides to just delete my account, which they can’t, I have nothing. I’m left with nothing. Whereas since I have a Mailchimp account, they’re able to house my ability to communicate with my people. So in general, I provide something for free. I get the ability to contact these people. If you want to unsubscribe, I have no problem with that. Actually, when people unsubscribe, I don’t have to pay for you to be on my listserv anymore. I actually don’t mind at all. So if you don’t look at the newsletters we send out, feel free to unsubscribe. But if you want to subscribe, then we’d love to communicate with you. 

I think that’s kind of the most important thing I’ve learned when it comes to telling people you have something to share with them, showing them that it’s meaningful, getting them excited about it, showing them that you’re a reliable person that has the know-how to get them the resource that they need to succeed. That is really critical. So that’s kind of some of the messaging there. 

[00:20:18] T. ULBRICH: Yeah. I think one of the other things you’ve done really well, Tim, that I admire is you’re consistent in your content. We know and we’ll talk in a moment about how you balance time with other personal responsibilities. None of us are perfect and consistent in delivering the same amount of material, but you’ve been consistent over the years in terms of there’s not months and months of like quiet phases, and then you dump a bunch of content. 

I think that’s so important for any – If we think about communities we like to be a part of or content we like to follow, it’s a consistent offering that we’re engaging with that content. So as you’re getting started, as someone’s getting started, I think thinking about what is – Once you decide on the medium, is it a blog, is it a podcast, whatever you’re looking at, is it something like a vlog, what is going to be your rhythm roughly that you’re going to be delivering content and making sure you’re showing up on a consistent basis with your audience and those that are finding value from what you’re doing?

[00:21:10] T. GAUTHIER: Along those lines, I think listening to your community is important. I had someone email me recently and say, “Hey, Tim. I wish you had a malaria cheat sheet because I’m studying for the BCIDP exam or the BCPS exam,” I forget which. I made one that weekend, and I really enjoyed it. I thought it was super interesting. I learned a bunch about malaria. So not only does it like help people advance their professional goals. It helps me remember things. I use my websites all the time to remember some of these nuances that are details that are just – You can’t remember everything.

[00:21:40] T. ULBRICH: That’s where I think the community piece comes in well too. You’ve got a good social media following. I’m sure people reach out to your questions all the time. You have students on rotation. You start to put some of those repeated questions into content buckets, right? I know you have a list of running content ideas. I’m sure you do. But once you hear a question more than one, two, or three times, it’s like, all right, maybe there’s something here in terms of a piece of content that we should be putting out. 

Let’s talk about time and balancing doing this. You’ve certainly made a strong case that there’s a lot of passion behind it. But nonetheless, like you’ve got a family. You’re working a full-time job. You’re precepting residents, students. You have expectations at home and at work. Like what strategies have you employed time blocking, or how have you been able to really leverage time so that you can continue to put out content on a consistent basis while working full-time?

[00:22:31] T. GAUTHIER: Yeah. Well, in the early days, and I was working at the Veterans Affairs Hospital in Miami, and they’re very strict in terms of their hours. So when you’re off duty, you’re off time. So everything that I did in the beginning was during off hours. That’s still the same today, but it taught me that you should only work on these things when you’re not on company resources, etc. 

But then I didn’t have small children in the early days, which meant I have had a lot more time, especially in the evening areas of the day. More recently, I have a three-year-old and a seven-year-old, and the evening hours are much more strenuous. So now, since we’ve developed more of an awareness in the community about IDStewardship, I reach out to people. When I see an article posted on like Twitter about something new that I’m interested in, I’ll reach out to the person who authored the article and say, “Hey, I’d love to have you write five things to know about whatever the topic is.” 

People almost always say yes because they want to share their passion. But it’s not just about me getting content. They now have a way to share that information. Sometimes, it’s the resident or the student or the second or third author that I work with. So they get an opportunity to share their voice. Coming up with strategies where I don’t have to do all the work has been one thing. Then also, like when you look at the development of like research and scholarly work in an academic position, you kind of look at it like a conveyor belt, and you want projects in all areas of your conveyor belt. 

Some things are in – You’re designing. What do you think it might look like, and you have your concepts, your list of projects? Then other things are going into publication, going out on the newsletter. So you’re constantly just like feeding that conveyor belt and keeping it going in different areas, and that’s how you stay productive over a long period of time. It’s not about taking one thing and rushing it forward but just maintaining that conveyor belt. There might be different conveyor belts that go faster or slower, and some things might take two years to do. 

But I always move forward with projects based upon what I think is like fun and interesting, and I don’t put pressure on people. I’m not out there saying, “Hey, if you don’t get back to me in two weeks, you’re not going to be allowed to do this.” If you don’t feel like doing this later because you have a problem, whatever. Don’t do it. If you want to circle back in two years, circle back into years, like no pressure.

[00:24:39] T. ULBRICH: Take us a little bit behind the scenes. I think one of the barriers that folks run into is they’re just trying to get started, and they go to someone’s site. They don’t necessarily have a picture of what are some of the tools and the systems and the processes that you have in place. You’ve mentioned a couple things already. Obviously, you’ve got the website infrastructure. You mentioned the email list. So like for us, we use WordPress for our website build. We use Bluehost for our domain hosting. We use ActiveCampaign for our email marketing. Then we have several other tools we use for project management and other things. 

So what are some of the tools that you use or that you have found to be helpful as you’ve been working on IDStewardship?

[00:25:18] T. GAUTHIER: Yeah, for sure. I use WordPress, and then I use WPX Hosting. Then for like the memberships, it’s PMPro or Paid Memberships Pro. I’ve been pretty happy with those overall. The WordPress in particular, it’s just overall really easy to use. You add a plug in. It updates. It’s no big deal. WPX is really – Once a year, I pay a fee. Once in a while, I’ll have a bandwidth issue. So I’ve learned that I need to downsize the images that I use when I post, which I think a lot of people kind of learn that lesson. 

I mean, that’s really the gist of it. Outside that, I use Mailchimp for my emails. I don’t really love how much they charge. I think they’re charging me like 250 a month for like 25,000 subscribers. So it’s great to have that many subscribers, but it doesn’t feel good paying $2,500 a year for that. But it also motivates me to put out content to use that tool that I’m paying for. So those are some of the key things that I’m using now. 

Otherwise, I just maintained like Excel sheets for a while. In the beginning, when I didn’t have as much content, I would do a lineup, and I would remind myself of when I posted to Facebook about a specific blog post, and I would just keep cycling through them. So I was always posting like one thing a day on Facebook. But it’s gotten to the point that I can’t do that anymore. I’d need to hire like a social media manager or something like that. I think as you grow, you need to start considering how can you work with who can you bring in. 

Another thing is as I’ve kind of met people in life through my way or through other venues, I work with them. So I just met a guy over the weekend that he prints things for a living, right? So there’s so much opportunity for us to collaborate with printing things. My audience is interested in topics of pharmacy and infectious diseases. So being entrepreneurial is one of the definitely keys to success here and also not being stuck in your ways, being able to evaluate things, and then accept feedback. If it’s not going well and someone tells you it’s not going well, take that advice and see how you can make it better and ask them, “Hey, how can I make this better?”

[00:27:13] T. ULBRICH: Yes, great advice, Tim. I think for people that are listening, and they hear 25,000 people on an email list and again not getting paralyzed from Jump Street. I think I love what you shared of it was a spreadsheet to begin with, right? I’ve shared before on this podcast that the first 100 subscribers on our email list were a combination of text messages and Facebook messages and LinkedIn posts that I had, and that eventually got added to an email software. Eventually, we added automations. Eventually, we added opt-in funnels and all those things, project management, social media management tools, things like that. But just getting started, you can do a lot of that manually. Get some of the things off the ground. Then as you get momentum, you can build out the systems and the processes that will help with efficiencies. 

Tim, if someone is listening and they are on the very front end of this, so let’s just pick another specialty that’s out there, and they’re thinking, “I’d love to build something in this domain, similar to what I see Tim doing with IDStewardship, Kelley doing with oncology. I also think about what Jimmy Pruitt’s doing with acute care out there in pharmacy,” like what advice would you have with them at the very beginning of their journey? If you think back to where you were when you started in 2015, like now looking back seven years later, like what piece of advice would you have to share with them as they get started on this journey?

[00:28:33] T. GAUTHIER: Well, I mean, first of all, not just because I – If I say something, it doesn’t mean it’s necessarily true. So it’s just my opinion on some of this. So feel free to disagree. But one thing I feel is that, especially when it comes to social media, people go on Twitter, on TikTok, on Facebook because they’re looking for things for themselves. So if you’re not putting out things that are going to be interesting to your audience, then your audience is not going to grow like they should. 

So everything that you do, no matter what you’re doing, should be aligned with why your audience is going to that area, and that’s going to help to get them to like it, get them to share it, which is very, very difficult in the pharmacy profession. We’re like 90% passive users. We love to learn. 

[00:29:11] T. ULBRICH: That’s right. 

[00:29:13] T. GAUTHIER: I’ll post something on Facebook, man, and it’s like five likes. But then I’ll see that I got 250 link clicks. So it’s very interesting. From an outside, you might look at my Facebook page or something and say, “Oh, I got a couple of likes or clicks,” and you can’t see the clicks, but you’ll only see a couple of likes, and they got lots of clicks. So it’s kind of one thing that’s important, I think, as you’re starting off. 

Another thing about starting off would probably be considered like long-term how you’re going to grow, and you’re talking about the design of your product. I think that core message and that core what am I doing here is really important. Over time, is that going to change? Because if it’s focused on something that’s relevant now like COVID, for example, or monkeypox, maybe that’s not relevant in two years from now.

[00:29:59] T. ULBRICH: It’s pretty cool. Yep, absolutely. That’s great stuff, Tim. I’m excited for our listeners, if they’re not already aware to follow the journey, and I hope they’ll opt in your newsletter. Where is the best place that folks can go to follow you and the journey and the work that you’re doing?

[00:30:16] T. GAUTHIER: Yeah. I mean, definitely IDStewardship.com, and you can sign up for our newsletter there or just follow along on Instagram or our Facebook or goods areas. Twitter, you can find me there as well. It’s a little bit more focused on infectious diseases and as a whole and staying up with the literature on Twitter. So either of those but the newsletters are really a good place to start.

[00:30:37] T. ULBRICH: Awesome. Thanks, Tim. Appreciate you taking time to come on the show.

[00:30:39] T. GAUTHIER: Oh, it was my pleasure. We’ve worked together for so long over the years. It’s really a wonderful opportunity for me, and I appreciate your time.

[00:30:46] T. ULBRICH: Thank you. 

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:30:47] T. ULBRICH: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 286: YFP Planning Case Study #5: Modeling Retirement Scenarios and How to Handle a Large Cash Position


YFP Co-Founder & Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP® is joined by Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®, and Christina Slavonik, CFP® to discuss retirement scenarios and how to handle a large cash position in this YFP Planning Case Study. 

About Today’s Guests

Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®

Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA® is a Lead Planner at YFP Planning. She enjoys time with her husband and two sons, riding her bike, running, and keeping after her pup ‘Fred Rogers.’ Kelly loves to cheer on her favorite team, plan travel, and ironically loves great food but does not enjoy cooking at all. She volunteers in her community as part of the Chambersburg Rotary. Kelly believes that there are no quick fixes to financial confidence, and no guarantees on investment returns, but there is value in seeking trusted advice to get where you want to go. Kelly’s mission is to help clients go confidently toward their happy place.

Christina Slavonik, CFP®

Christina is a Certified Financial Planner™ located in Texas and has over 15 years of financial planning and industry experience. She received her Certificate in Financial Planning from Southern Methodist University.

Christina is passionate about helping clients live their best lives now while not losing sight of the future. She enjoys the collaborative approach of creating a custom financial plan with her team at YFP.

Episode Summary

YFP Co-Founder & Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, is joined by Kelly Reddy-Heffner, CFP®, CSLP®, CDFA®, and Christina Slavonik, CFP® to discuss various retirement scenarios and how to handle a large cash position in this YFP Planning Case Study. Tim Baker introduces the fifth case study, examining the fictitious couple, Jane Smith and Tyra Lee, from Westchester, Pennsylvania. Jane, age 59, is a Certified Registered Nurse Anesthetist, and Tyra, age 60, is a pharmacist working part-time. Jane and Tyra also have two teenage boys, Thomas and Robert. During the discussion on this case study, listeners will learn about the couple’s plans to retire in three to five years, earlier than previously expected. Tim, Kelly, and Christina discuss options for care and long-term care insurance concerning Jane’s elderly mother, college plans, and a recent car purchase for their children. The discussion leads to considerations for how the couple might handle their massive cash position and whether or not to pay off debts with their reserves. Tim, Kelly, and Christina talk through the couple’s housing situation as they transition to retirement, their plans for purchasing a cabin or potential forever home, and how that may impact the financial plan.  

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TB: You’re listening to the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast, a show all about inspiring you, the pharmacy professional on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

Hi, I’m Tim Baker and today I chat with two important team members at YFP planning Kelly Reddy-Heffner and Christina Slavonik, both CFPs.

In this episode, we discuss our fifth case study of a fictitious couple Jane Smith and Tyra Lee, and their teenage kids Thomas and Robert. Jane is 59 and is a certified registered nurse anesthetist while Tyra, age 60, is a pharmacist working part time. We cover a bevy of topics that include in retirement in three to five years, where we model out different scenarios using our financial planning software. We chat about long-term care insurance, how to handle their massive cash position, and whether they should pay off some debt, their housing situation as they transition into retirement, college planning for the boys, and potentially how to handle care for Jane’s elder mother.

[INTERVIEW]

[00:00:58] TB: What’s up everybody? Welcome to YFP planning case study number five. So, I am joined today by Christina Slavonik and Kelly Reddy-Heffner, two of our CFPs on the YFP planning team. So, Kelly and Christina, welcome.

[00:01:14] CS: Thank you, Tim.

[00:01:15] KRH: Thanks, Tim.

[00:01:17] TB: So, we are recording this right before Thanksgiving. So, excited to get this recorded in the books and then enjoy some time off with family. I just would like to say that we are very thankful for all the listeners out there, thankful for the community that we’ve built, thankful for the two of you, Christina and Kelly being part of the team. And yeah, just really excited for the upcoming holiday season. Let’s jump into it.

So today, we are exploring a couple in Westchester, Pennsylvania, Jane Smith, and Tyra Lee. So, Christina, you’re going to take us through the first part of the fact pattern, Kelly is going to get into goals. And then, I’m going to talk about the wealth building, wealth protection tax and some of the miscellaneous stuff. And then we are going to dissect this client case study and see what are some planning opportunities? What are the things that should be discussed with the client, that we should really get in front of to make sure that they are on track with their financial plan? So, Christina, if you please kick us off on Jane Smith and Tyra Lee.

[00:02:18] CS: Sure. So, the clients we’re looking at today are Jane Smith, who is a CRNA, aged 59, makes about 194,000 a year and Tyra Lee, who’s a part time pharmacist, age 60, salary is 65,000. They are married filing jointly. They have two sons. I have Thomas, who is age 17, and is currently a student, and Robert, who was 14 and currently a student as well. They reside in Westchester, Pennsylvania, annual gross income is 259,000, which breaks down into monthly around 22,000, and then net after taxes and whatnot, 15,000.

Expenses for these people are fixed at about $5,977 a month. Variable expenses are the 4,500 a month, and the savings of about 4,400 or so. Their current living situation is they’re in a five-bedroom, single-family home outside of Philadelphia. They apparently have a great first floor master. And if Jane’s mom had to move in, they could accommodate her as she is ill and cash resources are currently limited.

[00:03:37] KRH: Complicated, right? This seems like a scenario that we’re seeing a little bit more of with some of our like pre-retiree clients, just that intersection between nearly adult children, but not quite adult and parents kind of having some needs as well. They both would like to retire over the next couple years. But they are thinking through making sure the children are taken care of, parent needs are also taken care of. They have a fairly large cash position and are not sure if they should leave it in cash or pay off some things. They have that home in Philadelphia that they like, it’s functional, but they’re not sure that this is the forever home where they want to stay indefinitely.

With the kid’s college tuitions, one tuition has is about to start, I think based on the age. One is a little bit further in the future, but they kind of want to see what the 529s are going to cover, and what they can maybe do out of pocket and what they simply can’t do. They’ve asked about long-term care insurance, kind of understanding the premiums and how those could change in the future. They might want to buy a lake cabin, maybe that could be the forever home or the primary residents. If they wanted to retire earlier, they had started at age 65. Could they do it like 62, 63? They’ve got a little bit of debt. They have a car note for their own vehicle, 1.9% interest rate. There’s three years left on that note. They also bought a car for the teenage children, so there is a payment of 545 per month, interest rates 2.25, three years also left on that. Obviously, they made those purchases prior to our current interest rates, or it would be much higher. They also have a reasonable interest rate on their mortgage at 2.75. But it is a pretty recent purchase. So, the amount left on the mortgage is pretty high and that monthly payment is 2,858. So, early in that, and that’s one of their questions.

[00:05:58] TB: So, picking up on the asset side of the of the ledger, Kelly had mentioned that they do have a good amount of savings tucked away. So, 143,000 in a joint savings account, 3,000 in check in, and then another 9,000 in an HAS that’s Jane’s. From a 401(k) perspective, looks like Jane is putting in 11%, which is the max for 2022, 20,500 into her fidelity 401(k) through her employer that’s invested in a target date fund for 2030. Tyra also has a 401(k). She’s putting in 31.5%, which is also max amount of 20,500.

Now, for the two of them, one of the things we’ll talk about that you have a catch up available if they want to do that, but she’s also her Vanguard, she’s in a Vanguard target date 2030. Jane has a Roth IRA. This is from a previous employer. It’s invested in a Vanguard 2030 fund. She’s not contributing anything to that presently. Tyra has a SEP IRA from her previous consulting work as a pharmacist. It’s 100% in the S&P 500. So obviously, there’s some little bit differences there in their allocation. And then they also have a taxable account that they’re putting in about two grand a year, $167 a month into a Vanguard target date 2060 fund.

So, it looks like this is going to be maybe a retirement fund, maybe for the boys. We have to kind of get some clarity on that. They do have a primary home that’s valued at 920,000 versus the 683,000 and change that’s left. And then, looking to potentially, maybe buyout another property that they could transition to. We’ll talk about that in a bit.

Overall, you’re looking at total assets, about 1.9 million, total liabilities of just over 725,000. So, net worth is about $1.25 million. We look at the wealth protection stuff. Jane has an individual policy, 1.5 million that expires at age 65. She also has a group policy through employer which is one-time income 194,000. Tyra has a $750,000 policy that also expires at age 65. And then she also has a onetime group policy through employer which is 65,000. They both have short term and long-term disability through their employer that pays out a 60% benefit for short term and long-term disability. They both have their own professional liability policies. And the estate planning documents are up to date.

But one of the things that they’re not sure of is if Jane’s mother has anything, which obviously can affect their financial plan. From a tax perspective, they use YFP Tax. So, thank you very much for that. They’re concerned about their pretax retirement investments and when Roth conversions might be helpful, so obviously there could be time where they’re maybe sunset into retirement, so they might be in a lower tax bracket. So, it might be beneficial to convert some funds over to the Roth. And then Tyra is willing to work more over the next several years if both can retire early. They’re wondering if they should pay off their debt based on the interest rates, and they also want to make sure that they are maximizing the FASFA for their sons.

So, a lot of stuff to talk about. What are the big things, I guess for you, Kelly, that jump out, that you would want to tackle first with regard to Jane and Tyra?

[00:09:07] KRH: Probably the first two is just like the taxable account, the cash position, like having a good understanding of what they have those in place for. Is it a future expense that’s very short term? Is it something more intermediate where we could do a little bit more with those resources? I do think for the wealth building, probably three of the investments are okay-ish, like the target date funds of 2030. I would want to just double check what’s in those funds, make sure they’re close to the right asset allocation, but the SEP IRA for retirement is a little bit more aggressive than it should be for their age, and I suspect the Vanguard target date 2060 potentially could be as well. That seems to make it seem like it’s for retirement, if it’s in the target date fund, but something that I would agree should be confirmed, for sure. But also, what Jane’s mother’s need is, I think, if some of the cash has been earmarked towards helping with some of her care, that would make a difference in kind of the recommendations for how to best put it to work, short term, midterm or long term.

[00:10:27] TB: My thoughts on the on the estate plan documents. I definitely would run out would want to run those to ground. We had some content about a book about how your parent’s estate planning or lack thereof can really affect your own financial plan. “Mom and Dad, we need to talk.” We can link that into the show notes. But I think that’s a vulnerability, and we want to make sure that that’s lined up. So, we’re not having to sue for conservative ship or do things that, if those documents are in place, are really going to put us in a bind later on.

From an asset allocation perspective, Christina, how would you broach this subject? Because obviously, there’s, Kelly’s point, digging in to fidelity 2030 target date fund, Vanguard target, not all target date funds are created equal. We have one that 2030 is probably a little bit – we’re going to be a little bit more conservative than the S&P 500, or the 2060. So, what would be your process to kind of get them in the right model right now, three to five years from retirement, they’re probably going to want to be the most conservative that they ever want to be. Because if the market dips now, it’s very hard to uncover, and that’s where we have to start having conversations of potentially pushing retirement age back, which is not a fun conversation to have. So, from an asset allocation perspective, how would you tackle that with Jane and Tyra?

[00:11:46] CS: Sure. So, first thing I’d want to look at is taking a deeper dive, like what exactly is built into these target date funds? How are they allocated? Mostly looking at the ratio of equities to bonds. So, someone who’s about three to five years out, they can be a little risky, but we want to see more of the bond exposure. Things starting to dial back, their savings years, so maybe looking more at a 60% equity, 60% to 70%, equity 30% to 40% bond allocation for them. And yeah, and then revisiting the S&P 500, for sure, since that is definitely a lot more aggressive than we would want them to be invested at the moment.

Also, another thing to consider too, Tim is we got to get people thinking too, what does my cash needs? What are those going to look like, as I’m getting closer to retirement? So, yeah, we might have some money earmarked that we could be investing, but we still need to have money set aside for emergency fund. Maybe, as you get closer to the retirement date, like have at least a year or so of cash saved up, that is one thing that we’re considering keeping it in a money market, or high yield savings type of environment as well.

[00:13:06] TB: Yeah, for sure. I mean, I think really looking at our processes to really look at the investments by approaching the client with a risk tolerance and seeing what comes out there. And then kind of comparing that to what we think their risk capacity is. So, risk capacity being like, what is the risk that they should be taking? The risk tolerances, what is the risk that they want to take? And they should be taken to your point, Christine, a lot less risk, because we want to really protect that principle. We don’t want to lose anything, and potentially have to push back the retirement or do something different because of where the markets are going.

So, I think foundationally, making sure that that’s there is going to be really important. And to Kelly, your point, 143,000 in cash money savings is a good chunk of change. Christina, you mentioned like, you didn’t say the bad word, but the bad word would be like, what is the budget had been through retirement, which is going to shape the emergency fund. It’s going to shape a lot of things, what’s the retirement paycheck going to look like? The clarifying questions I would want to have is like, what is that 143,000? Is that to pay Thomas’s tuition next year? Do we run that money through the 529? I don’t see a 529 on the balance sheet. But the benefit that PA residents get from a state tax deduction is pretty generous. I think it’s 16,000 per beneficiary, 30,000, 32,000 per filing jointly.

So, if you can shelter some of that, that would be great. But what is the savings account for? What’s the taxable account for? Is the taxable account, is that earmarked for retirement? They’re in a position right now where I’m assuming Jane, if she’s not beyond 59 and a half, she will be sued. So, all of these 401(k)s, Roth IRAs, SEPs, like they can be accessed and used for whatever purpose so we can use some of that money for things that are other than retirement, but I would just want to clarify, what’s the savings account for, what’s the taxable account for, et cetera, before we kind of get into how to deploy these accounts, and again, making sure that, we need an emergency fund, let’s not invest it in a risky way. But we want to get that yield. I think, high yield savings accounts are now at 3%. You can get CEs at 4%. Even the eye bond is still attractive. I think it’s 6.8% plus a fixed rate at point 4%. So, there’s some liquidity issues there. But that might be a good place to park some dollars. You can put up to $10,000 a year there.

So, Kelly, if they’re asking, are we on track for retirement? How do we best answer that question? I’m a visual learner. So, are there things that we can show the client to kind of model that out a bit? What’s that look like on your end?

[00:15:50] KRH: I think these are very, very good questions that we do get from clients. And we ask clients to work on uploading and linking documents to eMoney. So, it’s a software tool that we use, that can be very helpful and looking at where things are at. Even to answer the question about the 529, they’re not listed on their spreadsheet. But they do have –

[00:16:17] TB: Oh, they do have. Okay, good.

[00:16:19] KRH: – do have them. And actually, they don’t pull across on a balance sheet either. So even when we’re working with eMoney, because they’re technically assets for the beneficiary. So, there are the two 529s in place. And you’re right, that Pennsylvania is quite 529 friendly with the rules. But when we get that question, like, good, not good, like we do a nest egg calculation, but then we can also go in the eMoney and look at goals, just to see overall. I’m going to pick one of the scenarios that they were kind of asking about the retire early. The baseline facts is like, based on now how things look towards retirement, and they originally had an age 65.

So, we’ve got the 65 in here, this 95% would suggest like, looks pretty good for being able to retire at that age. We have a couple expenses embedded in. We’ve got college costs, but we can add in college, I mean, we could probably spend the whole rest of the day and Thanksgiving, turkey dinner, talking about things we can do in eMoney. But just to give a high-level overview, we can enter education as like only the 529s cover that expense or do they want to pay out a cash flow a certain amount to help with that goal. We can enter specific school, so they wanted to see public school, public state school, and they wanted to see a private school just to have a comparable.

So, we’ve added in both of those. From here, I like to look at some cash flow reports, so this gives you a like, this looks reasonable and doable. Even the retire early like looks pretty reasonable, but then it is good to see the layers just to make sure things are input pretty well to reflect what the client wants to accomplish. Do the expenses. Tim, you’re right, spot on, are the expenses accurate for what the client is looking to do? So, we entered in living expenses, their liabilities, going to be the mortgage. They have some other expenses added in so they have car purchases every couple years. This is the 529 expense coming across.

So yeah, we do like to take the information that the client provides. Our data is only as good as what accounts are linked. But then we can go back in and run some of those scenarios too. Can they buy the lake cabin? Now, it’s entered as an additional property, not instead of their primary residence. This is less successful. We do like to see above 80%. I guess, I probably on the conservative side like to see 85 to 90. I think when Christina and I look at scenarios, because there’s things that can happen in between that really do impact. Like this really does not include Jane’s mom. Does a certain amount need to be embedded to help Jane’s mom and what is that amount per year? But we can add that? Is it an extra $1,000 a month for her care? Is it 500? Is it something different? But those are important combo situations like what do Jane and Tyra collaboratively think they can do? The conversation is really important with both of them. They have to be on the same page about what they’re willing and able to do and maybe make tradeoffs about to help in that scenario.

[00:20:19] TB: Yeah. So, for those of you that are listening to this, maybe in the car, don’t necessarily see the visual, if you’re not watching us on YouTube, on our channel, what Kelly is really presenting here is an illustration of what ifs. If we buy a lake house to retire early, what is the probability of success, if we have to use these monies for different goals that we have? Are we still going to have money at the end of our plan?

So, what the tool does is that it uses simulation, it uses 1,000 randomly generated market returns and volatility, called trial rounds to say, okay, 95% or 950 times out of 1,000, there’s going to be money leftover of the plan, and anything above the threshold of 80% or 82%, is good. And typically, if it’s lower, we’re going to adjust the plan as we go to make sure that there is money left over. So, the idea is to keep, there is money, between now and then when you when you pass away.

So, the nice part about this is it allows us to kind of toggle on and off different scenarios, to see how it affects the overall nest egg, so to speak, and provide some math behind it. So, the nice part about this is that, you can kind of talk to the client, and you can talk to Jane, you can talk to Tyra and you say, of all these different things that we’ve extracted from your goals, whether it’s a cabin, or being able to take care of your mom, or retire at this age versus this age, what’s the most important? And then basically turn those on and off to see, okay, once we get to this threshold, then the plan might be in jeopardy and we can adjust from there.

But I think this is great, and a visual perspective, and this is the way I learned. I think, like from a client impact, I think, this is huge. Yeah, this is great modeling Kelly. Christina, when you look at this particular client, at least from some of the models that we’re seeing, are there things that you would want some additional information, whether it is Jane’s mom, or maybe more additional information on what is the goal for the education planning? Is it the put the boys through four years of school? Is there a certain percentage? Are we using some of that? Are we counting on scholarships? Are we counting on debt? What are some of the approaches that you would take with the client to kind of refine this out a bit?

[00:22:39] CS: Yeah. So again, just digging more into the weeds. And to your point with the education. Yes, are they going to be relying strictly on loans? Or are there scholarships involved? Or is it a combination of all three? Are they going to be funding, maybe a third of it, from their cash flow? Some from the 529, others from scholarships?

So, we’d like to see some diversity, so to speak, when it comes to funding college needs, especially if 529 is not going to carry the weight. And then looking at savings and withdrawals for the education expenses, as is it does look like there is going to be a shortfall. So, having more of those conversations, again, what is the 143,000 saved for? Is part of that going to help Thomas and Robert. But then again, looking back at what they had given us with the 529, how is it invested? Kelly, when you had shown us that it looked like it was probably just in the money market at the moment, and I would be more curious to see, well, A, is it linking properly. But B, is it indeed invested? You have to have a good solid allocation in there, if you want that money to work for you, over the period of time they have left.

[00:23:53] TB: And probably a good chunk of that money for Thomas, who’s the 17-year-old should be for a money market. It’s almost like you were saying like you want, maybe, like a year’s worth of cash for retirement. That might be true for the first year or so for tuition. But then the balance of that should be invested. I think Thomas had 45,000. So, a good chunk of that should be either in a balanced fund or something like that. For Robert, who is 14, and he saw us four years until the first year, we probably can be a little bit more aggressive. And then, as we get closer, same thing with retirement, we’re having more of a bond allocation, less of an equity allocation. The money mark is going to do well today just because of inflation, but you’re also being killed by that purchasing power that’s kind of being eroded every year.

So, what Kelly is showing right now on the screen is kind of the shortfall, the projected shortfall for the education expenses and it basically showing us what percent is underfunded, which is not necessarily a bad thing. We kind of talked about the rule of 33% and where we want, if we’re saving for a kid, a kid’s college, and we don’t really know what our goal is, it might be okay, we’re going to try to get x amount into a 529, pay x amount from , in that year, that’s the salary in that year for college. And then maybe the last third comes from scholarships, student loans, et cetera.

So, this is kind of showing us what has been underfunded so we can kind of plan for that and know what to do, so great stuff. Kelly, can you shift back to the case study real quick, I want to have a discussion that we really haven’t had much discussion on. We talked about Social Security in the past, I think, again, pulling their statements is going to be really important to see where they’re at. But I really want to talk a little bit more about the long-term care, and then Medicare decisions. So, walk me through, how would we approach those? Obviously, these are two things that, I think, there’s a lot of kind of negative press around long-term care insurance. It shouldn’t be something that we sell fund. What is long term care insurance? Why do I need it? So, I guess, let’s start there, how would we approach this particular risk that Jane and Tyra have to their financial plan?

[00:26:12] KRH: I will admit, it is a little bit newer territory for us, like typically, with our client base, we’re not having a ton of conversations about an immediate need. So, we have done some work recently, just to be better educated and to kind of get up to speed on some of the products. So recently, talking through kind of two products. One is a pretty traditional, like, pay a premium, get a policy, and it covers a certain amount of care per day, calculated out on an annual basis. And one of the biggest issues with those policies is like premium goes up. We had some education that I found to be very concerning, and enlightening, just so we know the premiums can go up. But with state regulations, there’s not a ton of regulation on how much the premiums can go up. So, that’s one of the challenges is like, if you buy a policy, you have it for like 10 years, your age 75, and the premium goes up and it becomes unaffordable. Pay 10 years into it, but you have to stop, that’s a concern.

So then, there’s a hybrid product that has some insight into that premium piece, but also provides a death benefit. Because the other concern is you never need the long-term care. You’ve paid for this premium, you have, unfortunately, a death event, without any care happening, and all that money has not been allocated anywhere else. So, there are some things out there. I think that’s kind of one of the things we’ve been working through, is understanding those policies, and then write the comparable, like many insurance products, is like if you paid for it out of pocket and funded it yourself. So, kind of running some scenarios like, that’s one of the things we started to build out, and that eMoney scenario was, if you take the premium and put it away, like how much could that grow? Because it seems like the premium, happy medium timeframe is like age 60 to 65 to start a premium then.

But again, a lot of things that we are learning about too, because there’s been a lot of movement. I think there used to be the person that was talking with us about it, like thousands of long-term care providers, like insurance providers, and it’s down to a very small quantity now, so a lot has changed.

[00:28:46] TB: Yeah, when I was first getting into the industry, it was that and it was tons of providers, premiums going up. I think the industry didn’t have enough information, because this is kind of a newer product, and some of these policies were priced, not correctly. They were – I think it was like low interest rate environment, which makes it makes it tough for them. People are living longer, or they’re alive longer with conditions that pay out a policy, because our medicine is better. I think though that, we’ve kind of gone through the burst of the bubble. I think a lot more of these policies have stabilized. I think you can still see increases I think the hybrid model is good in a sense that there are – it’s guaranteed, so your premium is fixed. Whereas, that’s not necessary for long term.

To back up, for those that are thinking like what are we talking about, long-term care, really what it is, it’s a broad range of skilled custodial and other types of care that’s provided over an extended period of time, due to things like chronic illness, physical disability or some cognitive of impairment. And the scary number of this is like roughly 60% of Americans are going to need some type of like long-term care in their life, and I think that number is continuing to go up. So, this is where, I think, a lot of people think of like nursing home, and that’s not we’re really talking about. I think the idea behind aging in place and keeping you in the home, as long as possible. 

So, if you are getting older, and you’re starting to have problems bathing or dressing or with personal hygiene or eating, you would have someone come in and help and aide. For a lot of people, it’s a family member, or it’s a spouse, which can take a toll on their own mental, physical and financial health. I think, my perspective on this is evolving, but I think that studies have shown that couples, when they look at this type of care, are willing to spend, on average, in the range of $2,500 to $3,000 per year to get some type of policy, and you can get pretty decent coverage by doing that. I think it’s establishing a baseline at least to cover like home care. So, to have somebody come into the house and 80% of care that is provided through these policies, is homecare.

I think conversation, is what really what we need with Jane and Tyra. I think it’s to kind of demystify it a little bit, maybe not make it as scary as I’ve been led to believe or has seen. Because this is a major risk, like if you can – this can be a major drain on the financial plan if you don’t have that large reserve of cash or investments, or a policy in place. So, I think it’s important to kind of get in front of it, and just have a have a good conversation and at least have a baseline policy for homecare, I think would be a good starting point. And then see like, what are the social like, is Thomas, is Robert, are they going to be a safety net? Or my dad always says, “Just put me on the ice float and give me the Eskimo retirement.” That’s kind of what he’s looking for.

But I think, some of the social networks that you have, in terms of talking through this is going to be important as well.

Christina, how about Medicare? What’s your take on this? Obviously, they’re a couple years away from enrolling in Medicare. But how do you approach this with Jane and Tyra in terms of how that works?

[00:32:21] CS: Yeah, so I think it’s just giving them a high-level approach to what to expect like a year in advance. So, when you reach age 65, the window opens up three months before their 65th birthday, and they have until three months after their 65th birthday. So, in essence, is a seven-month period. You can go in, enroll your Part A, Part B, if necessary. Most of times, it will be, because if you’re retiring, you’re going to be off of your employer’s medical plan, and you may not have to worry about correlating benefits at that point. So, it’s really not that scary. And then, on an annual basis, once they are involved with Medicare, there’s ways you can change up your plan or your drug plan as you need to, and there are resources and people to help you with that.

[00:33:12] TB: Yeah, the enrollment period is going to be super important, right? It’s typically three months before you’re 65, and then three months after you turn 65, so it’s like a seven-month enrollment period for initial. You want to do that so you’re not penalized later, that can happen, so you don’t want to blow through that enrollment period. I think that you get a ton of mailers for that to remind you.

But I think the big decision from there is like do I do Original Medicare A and B? Or do I do a Medicare Advantage plan which is a kind of more like private insurance HMO that Medicare reimburses for on a per participant basis? There’s I think, hundreds of plan Ds, which is the prescription. Do you get a Medigap policy with Original Medicare? There are so many things that go into this. And that’s going to go into like, what’s your view on, do you want convenience? Most providers will accept Medicare insurance, but it’s not necessarily as simple as maybe like a Medicare Advantage. If you’re going to be a snowbird, like if they decide, “Hey, we’re going to buy this cabin, but we also want to buy a place in Florida.” Having care coordinated between those two, if you’re in a Medicare Advantage is more like an HMO. So, if you’re out of network, that can be problematic.

There’s lots of different things that go into this. At the end of the day, this is probably one of the bigger concerns, I think, that people have is like, what does this look like? If there is a gap, if they decide to retire before age 65, what do they do? Is that something like Cobra? Does the employer offer anything that’s becoming more and more of a dinosaur feature of late? The other thing that we didn’t mention that, Christina, we were talking about off mic was like, even long-term care insurance, I think we’re seeing that show up on an employer benefit. So, really taking a look at that and what’s provided there. The big things with long-term care, just to circle back to that is like, when we’re looking at this, what is the monthly benefit that we’re targeting? If we are trying to cover home care, you can – Christina was telling me about this awesome calculator that you can find at your state, this is what it costs. So, it’s 5,000, it’s 6,000, like, we’re going to target that. What’s your deductible period? So, that’s the elimination period or the time you have to wait before you have benefits. So, a lot. It’s just like disability insurance, a lot of them are built as 90 days. How long is the benefit going to pay out? And then like, do you want an inflation rider?

So, to circle back on those things, those are the conversations we’re going to having concert of like, what do we do with Medicare? If there is a gap in Medicare, what do we do, et cetera? But I think Kelly, the only other thing that we probably should discuss briefly, that the client brought up, I think this is the one thing that I have outstanding here is the debt. So, one, is should they be concerned about the amount of mortgage debt? Should they use some of that cash set savings for the car note and pay it off? Obviously, interest rates have moved a lot, over the last year or two. So, what would be your answer to that question? Obviously, we probably need some more context with what’s going on in different parts of the plan. But how would you approach that with them?

[00:36:07] CS: Right, so it is interesting, like, I think just baseline, high level, the mortgage, usually, it’s more desirable to not have a mortgage in retirement to have the cash flow be less. But I am intrigued by like, this is not the forever home. It’d be nice to know, well, like how long? When would the transition take place to either a smaller home or to that cabin? We see a lot of people talk about being expats too, which is kind of interesting, depending on what happens with Jane’s mom and the kids in college, is that on the radar as well? 

So, like the mortgage, I feel like normally would be a priority to not have on the table. But in this case, I don’t have as much of a concern about it, if there is a potential for a transition that we can talk through, to see what is affordable. Is the 2858, is that affordable in retirement with the rest of the expenses? The cars, I would say that interest rates are lower, which is good. I wonder if maybe the kiddos would like to contribute and pay off if they’re going to eventually take ownership of the car. I feel like having the kids have some type of responsibility, some piece of the puzzle that they have to take care of, whether it’s paying part of their car insurance, definitely upkeep, maintenance gas. I personally think it’s an important piece for them to feel some type of responsibility. So, I guess I’d be curious as to their student jobs and the college, and can they help take care of the one vehicle. I guess, I’d be inclined to maybe pay off the other depending on what the other goals with the cash flow is.

[00:38:03] TB: Yeah, mathematically, I wouldn’t be in a rush to pay off the notes if you can get 3% in a high yield and both these notes are 1.92, 2.25, doesn’t necessarily make sense. But some of that is just kind of peace of mind to clear the balance sheet on the liability side. But the mortgage is I think the bigger one, the bigger shoe that we’d have to figure out, like how it’s going to drop because there’s some equity in the primary home, what it’s valued at, versus the mortgage. My big thing is if they buy the cabin, they would have essentially two mortgages, that if they sold the primary house, they could pay off the original mortgage and maybe apply some of that back to the cabin. It’s just a matter of like, what’s their comfort level in terms of carrying a mortgage debt into their 70s, 80s, et cetera.

So, there’s nothing concerning about, I think they’re on a fixed rate for the mortgage, so it’s not like it’s a variable rate or an arm or anything they have to worry about, but it’s just kind of the comfort level and then how is that, to your point, that 2858 go into play on a fixed income when we’re talking about generating a paycheck from Social Security, from the retirement assets and maybe any part time work or whatever they’re doing, so that would be the main concern.

What did I miss guys? I feel like we covered a lot of ground here. This was great. This is a great case study. Did we did we miss any question?

[00:39:30] CS: FAFSA, Tim, which is –

[00:39:31] TB: Oh, yeah.

[00:39:33] CS: I mean, it’s mostly income in the formula and probably like that cash might be a little bit of – if you’re planning to use it for college expenses, like running it through the 529. Yeah, I guess if they retired, there’s the two-year look back period. So, at least Thomas would be pretty well through school. I think by the time, if they retired, but they might have an impact on Robert’s last year or last two years. But we get questions about maximizing the FAFSA and again, with the income being the biggest component, we don’t know what the kids’ assets are, those aren’t entered in the eMoney, usually don’t ask about those. But I guess I’d inquire about those too, make sure if they have an UGMA and UTMA that they spend those down first before the 529s, since they count different in the formula.

[00:40:34] TB: I think one of the things that I would say is I think some sometimes people are, because of the formula, they detract it from putting money into the 529. But I think, having that pot of money there that’s grown tax free, if it’s used for education expenses, is more valuable than I think not doing it because you think that the FAFSA equation is going to change.

So, just like, what we talked about, sometimes people do weird things that are out of character because they’re trying to like save on taxes. If going to college is a big part of the plan for your kiddos, the 529 is going to be one of the best – it’s depending on your state, but it’s going to be one of the better vehicles to do that and I wouldn’t let the FAFSA formula detract anybody from doing that. But I think, yeah, probably looking at some of those assets. I know you can also put assets in. I think grandparents’ name, and I think that doesn’t necessarily capture in the equation. So, definitely something that we want to look at as we’re tackling the other parts of the financial plan, so good stuff guys. I appreciate the chat here. I think very, very productive. And yeah, just look forward to doing more of these in the future and thanks for lending your opinion and how this client is shaping out. So, enjoy the holiday.

[00:41:55] KRH: Thank you.

[00:41:56] CS: You too. Thanks.

[00:41:57] TB: All right, take care.

[OUTRO]

[00:41:58] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and it is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog post and podcast is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analysis expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 285: Cracking the Code on Home Buying Loan Options


On this episode sponsored by First Horizon, Tony Umholtz talks through the current state of the home buying market and interest rates, how to navigate the home buying loan options available, considerations for all types of buyers, and unique lending considerations.

About Today’s Guest

Tony Umholtz graduated Cum Laude from the University of South Florida with a B.S. in Finance from the Muma College of Business. He then went on to complete his MBA. While at USF, Tony was part of the inaugural football team in 1997. He earned both Academic and AP All-American Honors during his collegiate career. After college, Tony had the opportunity to sign contracts with several NFL teams including the Tennessee Titans, New York Giants, and the New England Patriots. Being active in the community is also important to Tony. He has served or serves as a board member for several charitable and non-profit organizations including board member for the Salvation Army, FCA Tampa Bay, and the USF National Alumni Association. Having orchestrated over $1.1 billion in lending volume during his career, Tony has consistently been ranked as one of the top mortgage loan officers in the industry by the Scotsman’s Guide, Mortgage Executive magazine, and Mortgage Originator magazine.

Episode Summary

This week, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, welcomes Tony Umholtz, a mortgage manager for First Horizon, back to the show to discuss cracking the code on home-buying loan options. In their discussion, Tony and Tim talk through the current state of the home buying market and interest rates, how to navigate options available to all types of buyers, as well as some unique lending considerations based on commonly asked questions from home buyers. After a discussion on the current state of the market, Tony shares his comparison of the current state to where we were at the start of 2022 and makes some predictions for the rate and refinancing markets in the coming year based on the surprising results of the 2022 Consumer Price Index. The discussion then moves into the myriad of financing options available when making a home purchase and how to evaluate all of the options available. Tony shares a straightforward three-step process for home buying and then dives deep into the intricacies of home-buying loan options, their pros and cons, and which products are best suited to each situation. Tony shares various loan types and the down payment requirements for each. Tony also covers a general overview of the Pharmacist Home Loan product from First Horizon and addresses considerations for unique lending home purchases above the conventional lending thresholds, buying land or building a home, and house hacking.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] T. ULBRICH: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

This week, I had a chance to welcome back on the show Tony Umholtz, a mortgage manager for First Horizon, formerly IBERIABANK. During the show, Tony and I’ll talk through the current state of the home buying market and interest rates, how to navigate the numerous lending options that are available to purchase a home, and some of the unique lending considerations, including those home purchases that are above the conventional lending thresholds, those that are buying land or building a home, and those that are looking to house hack, occupying one unit and renting out the rest.

Now, before we hear from today’s sponsor and jump in on the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one on one with more than 250 households in 40-plus states. YFP Planning offers fee-only high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one on one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. 

Okay, let’s hear from today’s sponsor, and then we’ll jump on to my interview with Tony Umholtz. 

Does saving 20% for a down payment on a home feel like an uphill battle? It’s no secret that pharmacists have a lot of competing financial priorities, including high student loan debt, meaning that saving 20% for a down payment on a home may take years. We’ve been on the hunt for a solution for pharmacists that are ready to purchase a home with a lower down payment and are happy to have found that option with First Horizon, previously IBERIABANK/First Horizon. 

First Horizon offers a professional home loan option, aka a doctor or pharmacist home loan, that requires a three percent down payment for a single-family home or townhome, has no PMI, and offers a 30-year fixed rate mortgage on home loans up to $647,200. The pharmacist home loan is available in all states, except Alaska and Hawaii, and can be used to purchase condos as well. However, rates may be higher, and a condo review has to be completed. 

To check out the requirements for First Horizon’s pharmacist home loan and to start the pre-approval process, visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/homeloan. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/homeloan. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:02:34] T. ULBRICH: Tony, welcome back to the show.

[00:02:36] T. UMHOLTZ: Hey, Tim. Good to see you. Thanks for having me.

[00:02:39] T. ULBRICH: Really excited to have you as always. Really appreciate your perspective and your insights on the home buying market, on financing, on lending, and really supporting our community with the many questions that often come around this very important topic. So here we are, towards the end of 2022. It’s been a wild year, wild year all around, but especially in the home buying market. Hard to predict this one, right?

[00:03:03] T. UMHOLTZ: This was a tough one. Yeah. This has been a wild year, for sure. It really has. Interesting year. It really is. 

[00:03:09] T. ULBRICH: What are some of the trends? Obviously, our listeners are very well aware of what’s happening with interest rates. Right now, on the climb, obviously, there’s some uncertainty economically. A different day brings different headlines of what we may expect. Obviously, we just went through an election. That had some potential impacts as well. What are you seeing on the ground, as we get ready to wrap up 2022 and some of the trends heading into ‘23?

[00:03:34] T. UMHOLTZ: Well, we went – From the beginning of the year, we saw record low interest rates, and the Fed was determined, obviously, we’ve talked about this in previous podcasts, to stop inflation. That was the key driver of cycle is to kill inflation. By killing inflation, you got to slow the economy down, and that’s definitely slowed housing. There was record demand for housing. We still see good demand, and it’s interesting, though. We may have seen something shift. 

So last week, we did have the election. But the bigger data point for the economy may have been the CPI report, okay? So the Consumer Price Index came out last Thursday, and that reading was lower than economists had expected. Okay. Big shock, right? When we saw the stock market rally, we saw bonds rally, rates have improved since Thursday. We’re giving a little bit back today, but I think we could be in a trip now. 

One report does not mean, “Hey. We’re out of the woods, guys. We’re already out of the woods. It’s ready to go. Everything’s going to rip more going up.” But I do think if we continue to see this trend into 2023, rates are going to slowly fall, and we’re going to see better times ahead for the rate market. I really believe that, and we have a lot of demand on the sidelines. I’ve gotten a lot of clients reaching out to us. “Hey, we decided to rent the beginning the year because we didn’t want to get in a bidding war. We want to buy next spring.” I mean, as rates get better, you’re going to see more people come back to the housing market.

[00:05:06] T. ULBRICH: That’s what I’m interested in seeing, Tony. It feels like there’s naturally some pent up demand, and people that have been sitting on the sidelines, both on the buyer and the seller, right? You think about people who maybe they didn’t have to move but would like to move, and they’re sitting on a three percent, high twos, low threes rate, and they’re like, “Hey, I really don’t want to trade that for high sixes, sevens, wherever rates may be.” So I think there’s some pent up demand on the seller side, obviously, the buyer side. So it’ll be interesting to see where that shift is.

Our listeners know all too well the impact of those rates. Many people listening to this show, first time homebuyers or perhaps second home as well. But just a year ago, we are sitting at rates, 30-year fixed rates, hovering around three percent. Obviously, we’re now hovering closer to seven percent, a little bit north than that. Just for some round numbers, what that means is today, you can buy a $300,000 home for approximately the same monthly payment, principal and interest, that you could get a $500,000 home about this time last year. 

So a lot of people, of course, because of other financial priorities, are looking at what that monthly payment would be, and many of our listeners also looking at student loan payments perhaps starting back up in the New Year. At least lease, that’s what we know now. There’s a lot of activity in that space as well. So those are going to get folded back into the monthly budget. There’s just a lot of intersecting things coming together at one. So it’ll be interesting to see where things head into ’23. 

Tony, what makes me think, though, that if we do see and, again, obviously, we can only predict so much of what will happen, and we’ll all keep an eye on this. But if we do see rates come down some in ‘23, maybe even perhaps in the second half of ’23, I got to believe that the refinance market may pick up again. Is that fair for everyone that’s been buying here over the last six to nine months?

[00:07:02] T. UMHOLTZ: Oh, absolutely. Yeah. I anticipate we’re going to see quite a few people who have bought in the last six months be in a position where they can. I think you’re going to see rates trending better. It’s hard to say exactly where they’ll fall. But it wouldn’t surprise me by the end of next year if we see that 30-year fix closer to five percent. So if you bought a home and you’re at seven, I mean, you’re going to be able to get a two percent spread on that. I think we’ll know more as we go into the year. 

There are, and I guess some of the news here, I mean, consider one sector that’s been getting hit a lot of job cuts is the tech sector, right? It really did well during the boom there, and you’re seeing a lot of job cuts, a lot of layoffs. My industry has had a lot of layoffs. I mean, some publicly traded mortgage companies have cut like half of their staff. It’s amazing. So it’s been very tough in the real estate and mortgage industry. But at the same time, I hate to hear job losses, but those are the things that if we get into recessionary environment, the Fed will have to let off a little bit. 

The other interesting thing to look at is I’ve seen four inverted yield curves in my career. So this is 20 years I’ve been in the lending business, and we have a nice wide inverted yield curve. What that means is short-term treasury bonds or short-term bonds are yielding more than a long-term bond. So if you go to the Treasury site to buy a Treasury bond, for one year, you’re going to get 4.5 or greater today, and your Treasury is about a half point below that, maybe even more for a 10-year bond, right? It doesn’t always make sense to lock your money up longer with a lower rate. So typically, when I’ve seen that, again, nothing’s for sure. But you typically see lower rates in the future when you see that type of curve. I think that that’s going to lead to better things to come. 

But when the Fed is raising rates, and they still have a couple more – They’re going to be aggressive. We got to see what these reports come out to be because we could still see 200 basis points two percent % move higher in the Fed funds rate. What that may do, though, is widen that. Widen that inversion more. So we will see more Fed rate hikes and just what’s going to happen on the long end of the curve, and that’s where mortgages are priced. It’s more on the long end of the curve. 

I’ll add one more thing, just because some people may want to understand this. But we also have record spreads right now of mortgage bonds above treasuries. What that means is the spread that historically has been there is higher than normal. So if the 10-year Treasury is four percent, and mortgage rates are seven, they really should be [inaudible 00:09:49] to six, right? But a spread involved because the servicing value in a mortgage is no longer there. So if you’re faster, you’re not going to say, “I’m not going to pay for this right now because the odds are it’s going to refinance off my books,” right? 

So the market is dealing not only with higher rates but higher spreads. Once this stuff all comes down, we’ll get it more normalized.

[00:10:15] T. ULBRICH: Yeah. It’s interesting. Thinking a year ago, as we had a similar conversation, I don’t think either one of us would have predicted that, hey, we might see people refinancing in ‘23 at five percent, right? I mean, it’s just kind of crazy. We, obviously, saw historically low rates. Because of rates where they went up, the refi market largely dried up, and I think it’s going to be an interesting trend to watch in 2023. 

So today, we’re going to focus on the myriad of financing options that are available when making a home purchase to make sure that we’re evaluating all of our options. Of course, being informed as a buyer so that we make sure we’re getting the most bang for our buck. So I want to walk through, Tony, how you tend to think about the home buying process and getting to that point of the right loan for the right buying situation. I think this is really important, as we’ll talk about throughout the discussion whether it be rates, whether it relate to credit score, amount of down payment type of purchase decision. At the end of the day, we want to make sure we’re working with a lender that’s helping to identify and has our best interests in mind to identify a solution that’s the best fit for us. 

Step number one is we have to first know what’s the timing for the home purchase, and what’s the projected budget for the home purchase, right? So before we open up the box of the lending options and begin to work with a lender, when are we looking to potentially purchase, and what’s the budget, right? Because that’s going to help us inform what are the options that are available, of course, but also percent down payment, as we get into the different lending options, and, of course, how this fits in with the rest of the financial plan. 

Once we do that, and we’ve talked about that before on the show, so we’re not going to go into a whole lot of detail there, then we move to step number two, which is getting pre-approved. That’s the process we want to make sure that we’re, obviously, going to be eligible for a lending solution for that purchase. Tony, I think this is a place where we see folks get confused about prequalification, pre-approval, when to do this. So just tell us a little bit more, if folks are navigating this for the first time, what is pre-approval, and how is that different from the qualification process?

[00:12:27] T. UMHOLTZ: Sure. So there’s – You’ve heard of the pre-approval and the prequalification. Basically, the prequalification is just a basic – We’re running numbers, right, just based on your income level. Okay. I say proposed because we haven’t validated them with a credit report. So a prequalification is very easy. Let’s say you make $5,000 a month, and your current expenses, your car payments and your student loans, are $1,000 a month, well, then that’s your current income and debts. Now, you add the mortgage in there, and let’s say it’s 2,000 a month. Well, in that scenario, your debt-to-income ratio would be too high anyway because you’re 50% of your income. Okay. 

So a prequalification does not validate income with documentation or credit with credit report. A pre-approval is going to be – We’re going to validate your income with a pay stub or a tax return, and we’re also going to review your credit report. What mortgage lenders do is we run what’s called a tri-merge report. So a lot of consumers will say, “Hey, I’ve got a Credit Karma account, and I can see my experience score.” Well, that doesn’t always show or reflect what a lender will see, okay? So lenders pull all three bureaus, TransUnion, Equifax, Experian, and they look at all three, and they use the median score, okay? So a pre-approval is going to have your median score. We’re going to use that. We’re going to review all your debts and liabilities on the credit report to validate your income. 

It carries a lot more weight than a prequalification, and a lot of these realtors know that, and they oftentimes will not let you sometimes see the house or work with you until they have that in hand.

[00:14:06] T. ULBRICH: Typically, a pre-approval lasts for how long, as people are thinking about, “Is this something I should get?” Now, even though I might not be looking seriously for another 15, 30 days, how long does that pre-approval typically last?

[00:14:18] T. UMHOLTZ: Typically about 90 days, 90 to 120 days. One other thing too that we’re starting to do, and I think some others in the industry are doing, is we’re doing some soft polls on credit, where they don’t have a hard inquiry. So that’s something else, if it takes longer to – 

The one thing I do, and I just had this conversation this morning actually with a client, is it’s just such a big decision. I wouldn’t leave it to chance. When you’ve got a lot riding on, you slam dunk, and there’s no issues, and you have margin in your life, margin between what you’ve taken as income and what your liabilities are. It’s probably fine. But in this case that I had this morning, it was tighter than it should be, right? You should definitely make sure it’s worth the inquiry to have peace of mind and know what direction you’re going.

[00:15:07] T. ULBRICH: So at a high level, Tony, prequalification, essentially, self-reported data, pre-approval is validated information based on submitted income, paychecks, credit scores, and so forth. Okay. So if we assume that someone has done the diligence to know what the budget is and that it fits within the context of the rest of the financial plan, I always encourage folks, on the pre-approval, sometimes, especially first-time homebuyers that have been in this situation, you go from, hey, I’m just browsing to like I’m really serious. That can happen very quickly, right? I mean, it’s an exciting time. It can be an emotional time. So if you feel like there’s a high likelihood that that transition could happen quickly, then the pre-approval really allows you to be in that position to make an offer and be competitive in the market. 

Okay. So once we evaluate the purchase at the budget, then we get pre-approval. Step number three, Tony, is then we find the best loan. This is where I think folks may have heard of terms such as conventional loans, versus FHA loans, versus jumbo loans, lots of different options and solutions out there. The end of the day, though, it’s about working with the lender to determine which of these is the best fit for you based on perhaps credit score, based on down payment, based on rate. So help us understand at a high level what these options are and then, ultimately, how you as a lender are working with someone to determine what the best solution is for them.

[00:16:34] T. UMHOLTZ: Sure. So everyone’s situation is unique, right? Every application is unique. That’s one thing about lending is there’s really not too many cookie-cutter scenarios. I mean, there’s a few but there’s very – Everything has some sort of detail we have to work through. So let’s say we do the pre-approval, Tim. Once we go through the pre-approval, we’re going to determine is it – Look, are they trying to buy a jumbo loan? Do they need a jumbo loan? Are they a pharmacist or a physician or an attorney? Something that will allow us to do a unique product. First-time homebuyer program, how much cash do they have to put down? We look at all of those things, and we’re going to recommend the best product. 

When we evaluate that pre-approval, we’ll give the client, “Hey, here’s your best options based on a payment rate and down payment,” because everyone has a certain threshold. Some people, it’s, “Hey, I want the least amount of down product to avoid PMI.” Or your credit score might be in a situation where you don’t qualify for all the products, but you can – There’s another option out there that fits your needs. Then some people say, “Hey, I have all this cash to put down. I just want the best rate available.” So that’s part of the analysis of the pre-approval. We’re going to work through that, and we’re going to determine what is the best option. 

I can talk a little bit about some of the programs that are out there. There are – A lot of people have heard of FHA loans. There’s conventional loans, which are through Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac. FHA and VA loans are through the government. They’re also called Ginnie Mae loans and GNMA. Those loans are backed by the federal government. Conventional loans are also backed to some decree by the government because Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac are basically nationalized entities. Government-sponsored entities is what they’re called, and those loans are backed as well by the government. 

Then we have what’s called portfolio loans, which can be unique to a bank. Portfolio loans just mean that the bank holds that loan on its balance sheet as an investment. It’s not being backed by a government entity. So those are really the main types of loans that are out there. We look at – Again, nothing’s a bad loan. It’s just every – It’s whatever is the best match for that client need.

[00:18:50] T. ULBRICH: I think that’s just a really important point, Tony, because I think as folks are finding the right fit and solution of the lender they’re going to be working with, to me, this is a really important discussion of what are the options that are out there. What’s the best option available for me and that we’re not just necessarily looking at one option, whether it be because of that’s what they’re familiar with or because of how fees may be assessed on that product. But are they really understanding me as a pharmacist with this credit score, with this purchase price in mind, with this option to put down. Okay, with those chips on the table, what’s the best fit for me? Then let’s work with that, so I can get the best rate. Obviously, depending on the desire for how much they want to put down, make sure there’s alignment there. 

Now, I think one of the things I hear a lot, Tony, is pharmacists, especially first-time homebuyer pharmacists, are often leaning in an FHA loan or think that may be the best option for them. I think that’s typically because of either a lower percent down or, in some cases, they may have a lower credit score. I think that probably is a less likely scenario for pharmacists. But it may be certainly for some. But it’s typically the low down payment that they attribute to an FHA loan that they think that might be the best option. So tell us a little bit more about what are the down payment requirements and why that product typically might draw the attention of pharmacists. Perhaps it’s a fit for some. But many, it may not be the best option, despite them thinking it is. 

00:20:21 T. UMHOLTZ: That’s right. So FHA loans are extremely popular with first-time homebuyers and clients that are seeking less money down. It’s been – I’ve wrote hundreds of them in my career, and there are good programs, nothing bad about the product. I would say that most lenders, that’s what they’re going to offer, right? If they don’t have a loan like, for example, our company does because with less down, it’s not FHA. But FHA loans are excellent for no money down because it allows 3.5%, and you can get in with very little down. Rates are usually pretty good, and it’s also flexible on credit score. So for a credit score, it might be a little bumpy. It’s going to have some flexibility there and will be a good fit for some people. 

The other thing where I’ve used FHA quite a bit this year is for clients buying a multifamily. I want to touch on a few things with this. But like for a three or four-unit property, the specific county – Now, FHA loans have loan amount maxes, so there are maximum loan amounts on a county-by-county basis, and that’s throughout our country. So loan amounts are determined by that in metro area. That MSA, for example, okay? Around New York City, it’s going to have a higher four-unit threshold than maybe Columbus, Ohio, right? But you’re going to – But every area is going to be different. 

Now, so I’ll give you an example. This client bought a four-unit property. I think they spent 660,000, and they put 3.5% down and lived in one unit, okay?

[00:21:55] T. ULBRICH: Rented out three. Yeah.

[00:21:57] T. UMHOLTZ: Yeah. They had great credit. They could have qualified. But see, to do a conventional loan, right, you have to put 20% down. Okay. Now, they did have PMI. But they took 3.5% down on a four-unit property. So that’s where FHA is a great tool, right? The downsides of FHA that I find is that you’re typically dealing with PMI that can never be pulled off, okay? The loan is going to have PMI for life. That PMI is high too. So no matter what that rate is on FHA, it’s a big premium added to the monthly payment. 

The other thing is a loan limits, right. Some counties, the loan limits are going to be below. It might be 380, and you’re trying to buy a house for 475. So it’s going to limit you in what you can purchase. So those are the downsides of FHA, and that’s why we always look at the whole situation because conventional loans or it’s HomeStart loan through Freddie Mac, there’s all sorts of things that we look at. Of course, if you’re a pharmacist professional, you’re going to have options with no MI with three percent down. So there’s going to be more flexibility there in that product.

[00:23:07] T. ULBRICH: That was really my hope with this episode is that personal experience, I kind of went down this path, and I see a lot of folks come to us with questions that I think they’re often thinking conventional 20% down or FHA 3.5% down. Maybe there’s an awareness of the PMI, and maybe there’s not. But that those are the only two options that are out there, and that’s really the take home point of this episode is often there are more options, especially for pharmacists that are listening or depending on the loan size, and there may be some limitations. Yes, that low down payment of FHA loan is attractive. 

But, Tony, as you said, and I live this firsthand, our first home we bought with an FHA loan, for the exact reason that we’re talking about here, first-time home purchase. We were itching to kind of get into that home, weren’t at a place to save up to that 20%, saw the 3.5% option that was presented to us by the lender as the preferred option. I did know a PMI and what it was, but I did not know it was PMI that could not go away. I specifically remember getting a loan-to-value ratio. I think we’re – As we started to pay it off after five, six, seven years, we got that down into the mid-70s, 75%. 

I remember calling the lender of like, “Hey, all right. Time to get rid of PMI,” and it was like not so much. By the way, you paid the PMI upfront, and I was like, “Oh, okay.” So lesson learned, but I think that’s a really important takeaway that not all PMI, private mortgage insurance, is the same. Of course, the PMI rates can be different. Correct me if I’m wrong, on a conventional loan, if someone doesn’t put down 20% and they have PMI, there is an option for that PMI to fall off, but not an FHA loan, correct?

[00:24:52] T. UMHOLTZ: That’s right. Yeah. Conventional is very flexible. So if you’ve paid it for two years, you can actually have your house reappraised. If you think it appreciated and you paid down the equity, you can get the PMI pulled off. The other interesting thing too is let’s say you were to use a conventional loan and you put five percent down, you have PMI, but you sell your home, let’s say, and you get 15%, or you have additional equity, and you can put that down that same year, you can a lot of times get it pulled off immediately. There’s a lot more flexibility with conventional mortgages, for sure. Yeah. 

[00:25:28] T. ULBRICH: Just quick definition on PMI, for those that are going through this for the first time, so PMI, private mortgage insurance, is essentially allowing the lender to feel – You’re paying an insurance premium as what I’ve always interpreted as a foreclosure risk, right? So if I only have 3, 5, 7 percent down, it’s not a full 20% that you’d see in a conventional loan, then I’m a higher risk to the lender, if something were to happen that we were unable to make a payment, that I’m going to have to pay insurance for not having a larger down payment. Is that accurate, Tony?

[00:26:02] T. UMHOLTZ: That’s exactly right. Yeah. So there’s a set – Like conventional mortgages, for example, they have a set amount that the lender is – So up to 80% LTV, as an example. But above that, that additional equity is uninsured. So the lender could lose that, right? The investor can lose that. That’s why they have IP. 

With FHA, it’s a government-pooled program, but they collect that premium to pay for it. Frankly, they have some of the most highest losses in the industry. So that’s why that premium is charged to help keep the program going.

[00:26:38] T. ULBRICH: The other thing, Tony, I don’t know if this is just my experience, but we’re going to go sell our home, our first home, and we made the move to Columbus. We did it for sale by owner. I’m not sure I’d ever do that again, by the way. The buyer was using an FHA product, and it felt like the inspection requirements. I remember specifically the person who’s doing the inspection, and they wanted to come back and look at something. They referenced the fact that because it was an FHA loan, it was a more rigorous inspection requirement, and that was kind of annoying to deal with as a seller. 

So number one, is that an accurate statement? Two, is that a potential barrier for a buyer in a competitive market? If I’m selling a home, and I’ve got five competitive offers, and four of those are not an FHA loan, and one of those are, that I would rather deal with one of the non-FHA loans.

[00:27:29] T. UMHOLTZ: That’s a great point, Tim, and that’s exactly right. FHA loans are definitely more stringent on the inspection. But the appraisal is much more in depth. The other thing too, if you’re a seller, this is great for sellers, is that report on that appraisal. So let’s say your buyer applied for an FHA loan and he decides, “You know what? I’m not going to buy this house.” The appraisal that was done, that case number that was opened, any other client that comes to buy, any sort of potential buyer that comes to buy, they have to use that appraisal for six months.

[00:28:05] T. ULBRICH: So you know it.

[00:28:06] T. UMHOLTZ: Yeah. There are some things that get – FHA does have some downsides. VA can be even more stringent, veteran administration loans. As far as protecting the veteran, there’s some closing costs called non-allowables that the veteran cannot pay. So if you’re a seller, these are just things you should know and ask your real estate agents about. But also, the roof has to be in very good condition, government–backed loans. So there’s little nuances like that as a seller that you have –

[00:28:34] T. ULBRICH: Yeah. Certainly, not to say there’s not a place for FHA loans. You mentioned you’ve written many of them. I think I’m harping on it because it’s one that I experienced that I didn’t know there was other options out there like a pharmacist home loan, and it’s a question we commonly get. So I want to make sure that folks are aware of the options. 

It’s interesting, you mentioned one of the more strategic uses of that loan, which we’ve heard of as well, which is when it comes to buying something like a triplex or a quad, someone who’s looking at doing a little bit of real estate investing, while also living in that triplex or quad, that you can use an FHA loan. Get into an investment property with as little as 3.5% down. We’ve talked about that before, that concept of house hacking on the podcast. I would point people to episode 130. We had Craig Curelop on from BiggerPockets. I think that’s a really interesting concept for many pharmacists, they might want to consider. 

Tony, let’s talk about the pharmacists home loan product because despite the work that we’ve done over the last few years, I still find a lot of folks that are maybe not familiar with what that is, or they hear the terms doctor loans that are out there and have searched for those and come to find out that pharmacists are excluded from that product. So what is the pharmacist home loan product that is offered through First Horizon in terms of who’s eligible down payment and how it differs from the options we were just talking about?

[00:30:01] T. UMHOLTZ: Sure. So the product for pharmacists is – In a loan amount, it will likely change a little bit. Currently, right now, we’re writing them up to about 700,000. But that that could change in the New Year. But that’s currently where we’re writing up to. So it’s not something you could go buy a $2 million house on, but it does give you some bandwidth there. But basically, it’s a limited down payment option, still with strong rates. If you’re a first-time homebuyer, a pharmacist could put three percent down and have no PMI. If you’ve owned a home before, you can put five percent down. That program is allowed on single-family homes, townhomes, and condominiums. It’s able to finance across the property types that are out there, even do a duplex up to – It’ll do 15% down on a two-unit duplex, and it’s typically 20% down for a three or a fourplex. That’s why that FHA loan can be better for someone that’s looking to buy a multifamily. 

The other thing that I find that’s unique about it is a lot of times, my clients are putting 20% down who are not pharmacists, get a little worse rate than 5% down pharmacists. So anyway, that’s not to say rates change all the time. I mean, you are very cautious about talking about rates. But that is one trend I find as pricing still very good. There is no prepayment penalty as well. So if the market does shift, and it’s in a more favorable position in a year or two, you can always refinance without a penalty. 

Also, there’s not steep reserve requirements, and that’s significant because a lot of these programs out there for doctors, attorneys, professionals, they require you have reserves, and not having reserves is a big piece. So you could – If you have your five percent down payment and just enough for closing costs, you really don’t need to have a steep amount of reserves on hand to qualify, where some programs require six months of mortgage payments, which is pretty hefty.

[00:32:05] T. ULBRICH: So three percent down, no PMI, first-time homebuyer. Five percent down, no PMI, if they’re not a first-time homebuyer. I like to think about this, Tony, as kind of the best of both worlds of an FHA and a conventional loan, in terms of not having to put 20% down but trying to get rates that are competitive. If you were – Or you mentioned in some cases may even be more competitive and currently available in all states, except Hawaii and Alaska still, correct?

[00:32:34] T. UMHOLTZ: That’s right. That’s right. Haven’t spun for the licensing area. 

[00:32:38] T. ULBRICH: We’ll get there. 

[00:32:39] T. UMHOLTZ: Maybe soon.

[00:32:41] T. ULBRICH: Credit score is one thing we didn’t mention. Minimum credit score is 700. Or has that changed?

[00:32:45] T. UMHOLTZ: It’s still 700. That’s correct. That’s correct.

[00:32:48] T. ULBRICH: Again, another option here to put in the mix. Many pharmacists we see, obviously, as you mentioned, there is a maximum loan amount. So if you’re looking at a million, 2 million dollar home, obviously, this product may not be the right fit. But I would say for the vast majority of pharmacist homebuyers, often wanting to get into the home, maybe aren’t yet at that point of 20% down, I would highly encourage you to check out this product. You can go to yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan. Again, yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan. You’ll see more information there, where you can learn more and get connected with us, and we’ll make sure you get in touch with Tony. 

All right, let’s shift gears and wrap up by talking about specific scenarios or I guess some of the common questions that we get, where folks may be wondering, well, what about this, right? Once of those is coming off the pharmacist homeowners, “Hey, Tony. I’m a pharmacist interested in that pharmacists home loan product, but I’m looking at a purchase price that’s north of 700, 715, whatever that requirement may be at.” So at that point, what options are you typically evaluating for pharmacists that are above that lending threshold?

[00:33:56] T. UMHOLTZ: Great question. Again, everybody’s situation is different. So we’ve had – There’s a myriad of programs available for loans above that threshold, and some have as little as 10% down, which can be a good fit. I find that a lot of – It’s interesting right now, Tim. A lot of the contracts I’m getting have been above a million lately. It used to be split and I don’t – We seem to be getting quite a few of those. 

Now, a lot of those folks have money to put down, so a lot of them are doing 20% down. But there are options with 10%. For medical doctors, will do nothing down to a million five. So it just depends on who you are and what your occupation is. But just for someone that doesn’t have a – Let’s say they’re a pharmacist or just a business owner. We could still do 10% down, typically up to $2 million. So options out there for that. 

The other thing too is depending on where you’re buying, the Fannie Mae loan limits, for example, Freddie Mac loan limits, in different parts of the country vary. So there are some areas that are almost $900,000 for three, five percent down right. Conventionally, that was mostly in California, New York City area. There’s that, but Northern Virginia. But you’re getting a – We always look at the loan limits because there could be just normal conventional products that can be a fit. 

But we have quite a few jumbo programs. We have jumbo programs we hold on a balance sheet, and that’s a bank, right? So where banks who can hold – We do have jumbo loans [inaudible 00:35:29] balance sheet. Then we have loans through other institutions too, mortgage REITs that we can write as well. So there’s a lot of different options out there.

[00:35:38] T. ULBRICH: Again, another example of kind of find that lender that will help you look at multiple options that are available. Tony, next question I think that may be coming up is I’m looking at the current market of interest rates. We had a discussion at the beginning of the show of perhaps we see those come down in 2023. So some folks might be thinking about does this time period warrant looking at an adjustable rate mortgage. I think that when rates were where they were a year ago, this may not have made a whole lot of sense. But is this option becoming more viable? What is an ARM product, if you could explain that a little bit further, and how folks can evaluate this?

[00:36:20] T. UMHOLTZ: Sure, sure. So right now, with this inverted yield curve, ARMs are making more sense. Now, ARMs are – ARM programs, I’ll talk about this, and I’ll talk about qualifying for them. So the most common ARMs that you have out there are really, truly hybrid ARMs. They’re not adjusting to the market right now. Most funds we offer doing are not – You’re not in the market, adjusting on a monthly basis right now. You are actually fixed for 3, 5, 7, or 10 years. Those are typically the most common in the industry, and that’s what we offer. So a 3-year ARM, 5-year ARM, 7-year ARM, 10-year ARM. 

What that means by 3, 5, 7, and 10 is that the rate is fixed for that period of time. So a three-year ARM is rate fixed rate for three years, and then it can adjust after that, and it’s still a 30-year loan. These are all 30-year loans with a 30-year amortization. But they’re going to adjust after that fixed period. So typically, a 3-year ARM will have a better rate than a 10-year ARM because you’re only locking for 3 years to 10 years. 

These loans are great because I think most buyers are not in their home 30 years anyway. Especially in the 10-year, it gives you flexibility. The rates are better than fixed rates. So there’s a lot of good things with the ARMs right now, and we are seeing an influx of them. We’re writing. Especially on the higher-end buyers, I find that a lot of them want the ARMs versus a fixed. The downsides of the ARMs are they typically aren’t going to be available through any conventional product, right? So Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, FHA, VA, there’s no ARM to speak of. The secondary market has shut them off. So the only way to get an ARM product is typically through a bank. They’re going to hold on their balance sheet. Okay. So you’re not going to be able to get that through a government sponsor. But ARMs are great. I really do like them. 

Now, I will say – I’m going to mention this because no one knows for sure in the future, right? There’s a lot of people floating out there, this 2-1 buydown. If you really pull this 2-1 buydown apart, you’re paying for all this buydown interest. So you’re paying for it. There’s a good chance you can refinance anyway, and long-term fixed rate is higher than what you could get if you just locked in a fixed rate. So you got to be really careful and understand the fine print that’s out there. So I’m seeing a lot of those out there right now.

[00:38:46] T. ULBRICH: Can you explain that one a little bit further, Tony, the 2-1 buydown?

[00:38:49] T. UMHOLTZ: Yes. So what’s happening now is a lot of lenders are offering what’s called a 2-1 buydown. So let’s say they offer you a 30-year fixed rate at 7%. But what they’ll do is they’ll charge you interest to buy the rate down by two percentage points. Let’s say you’re paying 5% year one. Year two, you’re paying 6%. Then the life of the loan after that, you’re paying seven. But you’re paying the interest, right? Either they charge it – Most of the time that I see it, it’s being charged to the client directly. The other times, oh, the seller will pay it. Well, you’re still paying it, right? The seller would lower the price of the home if you ask them. 

That’s usually how it’s worked. I’m not a huge fan of it because you can probably get 6.625 on a 30-year fixed versus seven, if you just lock the 30-year in for life. The only reason I say this is what if rates don’t go down? You never know. We think and based upon history. It looks like it’s going to happen. But what if it’s stubborn, right? Inflation goes back up. It takes a few more years or whatever. That would be the benefit to that, and that’s good to have the fixed rate. So just something to consider. The 2-1 buydown is very common out there right now. It’s marketed a lot by mortgage companies, and you just have to understand the fine print.

[00:40:09] T. ULBRICH: Great stuff. Thanks for the explanation. Then finally, anything unique. So if somebody is thinking about building a home or buying land to eventually build a home on, any unique considerations from a lending perspective that they need to be thinking about?

[00:40:24] T. UMHOLTZ: Yeah, definitely. So there’s a couple ways that works when you’re building a home. You either go buy a lot that a builder owns, and you sign a contract with the builder, you give them a deposit, and they build it, and you close when the home is completed, right? So a lot of the national builders, that’s how they work. You give them a 10% deposit, and you get a loan approval. I just issued one this morning for a client. They’re going to take nine months to build. They’re going to put 10% down, and we’re going to write a higher loan to value, and they’re going to actually going to get some of that money back when they close. 

That is a typical – That’s called as an end loan, right? The builder will build it on their credit line, and then you just close when the home is completed. Okay. That’s the first option. The second option is what’s called a construction to permanent loan. What that is, you’re actually building the home. You’re constructing the home with a loan. This is a much more complex transaction. It requires a much stronger borrower because, typically, you’re putting down at least 20% down in that scenario, and you’re buying the land, and you’re building. 

Sometimes, you buy the land first, you got to get a lot loan, and then you have your plans and specs and your agreement with the builder. You’re combining both of those together to build a home, and that’s called a construction to permanent home loan. It’s typically the only way to build a custom home on a lot that you picked out or you own, okay? So that’s something that is much more complex, but it’s something that we do a fair amount of it. It’s just a – So basically, in that situation, Tim, you’re going to pay incremental interest on draws paid to the builder, okay? So if the builder says, “I’m going to need five draws to build your home,” each time the lender pays a draw to the builder, there’s going to be interest calculated, simple At the end, you just convert to your permanent loan. 

We lock the rate up front. Some lenders do. Some don’t. But that’s basically the premise of how it works, and you want a construction to permanent loan because it’s a single one-time close. 

[00:42:25] T. ULBRICH: Tony, another example of where the value of the relationship comes in with the lender and, obviously, someone who’s been down whatever path you’re going down. I think that’s what excites me so much about our collaboration and relationship over the last few years. If you’ve worked at a lot of pharmacists and a lot of scenarios, first-time home buy, non-first-time home buy, investment property, house hacking, buying land, building their own property. It’s someone that we can put a face to a name, and we have an opportunity to connect with and ask questions, which I know many of our listeners do. 

So super grateful, as always, for your time and your contribution to the community. Again, folks can learn more about First Horizon, our collaboration, and get in touch with you by going to yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan. I would also point people, we’ll link to this in the show notes, just a couple of months ago, Tony and I did an FAQ episode on financing options, commonly asked questions. That was episode 271, for those that are going to be going through this process here in the near future. 

Tony, as always, thanks so much. I really appreciate your time.

[00:43:29] T. UMHOLTZ: Yeah. Thanks for having me, Tim. Great being with you. Have a good one.

[00:43:33] T. ULBRICH: Thank you. 

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:43:34] T. ULBRICH: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 284: Monetizing Your Clinical Expertise with Dr. Jimmy Pruitt


Dr. Jimmy Pruitt, an emergency medicine clinical specialist and entrepreneur, discusses what led him to start the Pharmacy and Acute Care University, how he monetized his clinical expertise through developing masterclasses, workshops, reference libraries, community forums, and webinars about the effective use of medications in the management of critically ill patients, how he has balanced the start and growth of his business while working full-time, and the role his business has played in helping him achieve his financial goals.

About Today’s Guest

Dr. Jimmy Pruitt is originally from Orlando, FL, and is a combination of nerd and gym funky having a background as a division 1 cornerback then turned Doctor of Pharmacy from Presbyterian College School of Pharmacy in 2017. He completed a PGY-1 Pharmacy Residency at Florida Hospital Orlando, and then went on to Grady Health System in Atlanta GA for his PGY2 Emergency Medicine Residency. Dr. Pruitt is currently an Emergency Medicine Clinical Pharmacy Specialist at the Medical University of South Carolina in Charleston, SC.

Dr. Pruitt was honored with the Excellence in Diversity from MUSC College of Pharmacy, Presbyterian College School of Pharmacy (PCSP) Alumni of the Year, and keynote speaker for the 2021 PCPS graduation. Dr. Pruitt’s professional interests include cardiac arrest, shock syndromes, trauma, hosting the #1 Emergency Medicine Pharmacy Podcast “Pharm So Hard” and operating his new pharmacy academy called Pharmacy & Acute Care University.

Episode Summary

This week on the YFP Podcast, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, sits down with emergency medicine clinical specialist and entrepreneur, Dr. Jimmy Pruitt. They touch on what led Dr. Pruitt to start Pharmacy & Acute Care University, how he has scaled the business, and how entrepreneurship has moved him forward in his financial plan.

Dr. Pruitt started by answering questions presented to him by other clinicians, often looking for resources for himself and other pharmacists. Jimmy decided to start Pharmacy & Acute Care University, meeting a need in the community while monetizing his clinical expertise by providing pharmacy-related content from a pharmacist with experience. To date, Jimmy has developed masterclasses, a reference library, workshops, community forums, live seminars, literature reviews, and webinars about the effective use of medications in the management of critically ill patients. One of Dr. Pruitt’s goals for the platform is to be inclusive of healthcare providers outside of pharmacists. 

Tim and Jimmy close the interview with a conversation about balancing entrepreneurship with competing responsibilities. Jimmy shares the first steps he took to build his business, how he has formed his team behind the scenes, and how he overcame some early challenges of expanding the PACU and its offerings. Lastly, Jimmy shares some personal insight on how Pharmacy & Acute Care University helped him reach his financial goals and reframe his view of retirement.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrich here and thank you for listening to The YFP Podcast, where each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

This week, I had the opportunity of sitting down with emergency medicine clinical specialist and entrepreneur, Dr. Jimmy Pruitt. During the show, we discussed what led him to start the Pharmacy & Acute Care University. How Dr. Pruitt has monetized his clinical expertise through developing masterclasses, workshops, reference libraries, community forums and webinars. How he has balanced the start and growth of his business while working full time. And the role that his business has played in helping him achieve his financial goals.

Before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YPF Planning does in working one on one with more than 250 households in 40 plus states. YFP Planning offers fee only, high-touch financial planning that is customized for the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one on one with a certified financial planner, who may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call at yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning’s financial planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom.

Okay, let’s jump into my interview with Dr. Jimmy Pruitt.

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:20] TU: Jimmy, welcome to the show.

[00:01:21] JP: Oh, thanks for having me on. It’s definitely a pleasure to get started with this and talk to you guys a little bit more about in Your Financial Pharmacist.

[00:01:31] TU: Yeah, I’m really excited to share with the YFP community about how you’ve been monetizing your clinical expertise, a topic we’ve been talking more about on the show over the past couple of years. But first, before we get into all of that, tell me what drew you into pharmacy, where you went to school, and when you graduated?

[00:01:47] JP: Perfect. I was fortunate that in high school, I had a chemistry professor that really challenged me to think more outside of sports, because my plan A was to go to NFL, and get lucky and went to a pharmacy school that had a football program. It was great. So, I went to undergrad at Presbyterian College and went to pharmacy school at Presbyterian College, and I was fortunate that I was able to live up two my passion with pharmacy and football and really, gave me the background to want to connect with a team, to be a team leader, and to just produce something more than what I’m used to. So, that was really my background and just being good at chemistry, being good at math, and a special interest to the medications.

[00:02:29] TU: So, you graduate from Presbyterian in 2017. Tell us about the career path since then, post-graduation, residency and the initial clinical work that you’ve done.

[00:02:39] JP: After pharmacy school, I went to AdventHealth Orlando, and was able to get a very good foundation at that very large program. It’s one of the top five largest programs in the nation. From there, I really solidified me enjoying the acute care side of things, and particularly, the emergency department. Then from there, I went to Grady Health Systems in downtown Atlanta where I got to see and do more than I can ever imagine and that was just phenomenal. And more particularly, being able to see and manage those critically ill patients in a manner that most pharmacists and the laws don’t really allow them to do.

So, I really got hands on with those patients and really working with physicians, nurses and things of that nature really helped me understand my expertise. And then from there, my first job outside of residency was at Augusta University Medical Center, which is another large academic medical center that has a level one trauma center, really got my hands dirty there, and I was also still working at Grady Health Systems on my off time. So, I’ve worked quite a bit that first year and a year and a half. And as of lately, I’ve went to the Medical University of South Carolina, which is another again large center and trauma center as well, where I’m also part of the faculty at the School of Pharmacy and teaches on the acute care side of things.

[00:03:55] TU: Well, no wonder why you’re busy. Before we hit record, I asked you, “Hey, how are things going?” He said, “Busy.” It makes sense. You’ve got a lot going on and we’ll talk about the business in addition to the full time work here in a moment. But I’m going to brag on you for a moment because a lot has happened in a relatively short period of time. So, you graduated pharmacy school 2017. You did residency training, as you mentioned, PGY 1, PGY 2, and you’ve had quite a large amount of success as a new practitioner. You were honored with the Excellence in Diversity from MUSC College of Pharmacy. You were the Alumni of the Year from your alma mater, also the keynote speaker for their graduation in 2021. You’ve started a podcast, Pharm So Hard, we’ll link to that in the show notes. We’ll talk about, here today, Pharmacy & Acute Care University is really the business that you have been building to help clinicians that are wanting to improve themselves as it relates to that area of practice.

So, let’s jump into that. Tell us about when you decided to start pharmacy and acute care University. We’ll link to that site in the show notes. But it’s, pharmacy-acutecareuniversity.com. When you decided to start it and why you started it? What was the genesis and the origins for doing that?

[00:05:06] JP: Absolutely. So, the precursor to Pharmacy & Acute Care University was a thing I used to call a blog called pharmacy frothy pearls. And what it was initially, that was just a short form, a handout, it’s using front and back that really summarize a disease state or a particular topic, and many people really enjoyed that, and I was fortunate to win an essay, who’s got talent for that, but people want a little more. I kept trying to make pharmacy pros larger or more in depth, but it really didn’t – it really wasn’t what people wanted. And as I continue to build websites and continue to get more involved in the podcast, I wanted to see if there was a way for me to monetize some of this, so I can build these platforms. And really, the next step for me was to figure out a way to, okay, build something people want and go from there.

So, about last year, I was able to really go about doing things where I planned out, what would this look like? And that step for me was to be able to go for it and create a university or academies where I can build things that not only myself, but other preceptors that individuals can be a part of, and it really was something that was I just figured out, if you want a topic, let me know and I’ll ask people what they wanted. I looked online to figure out what are the disease these people are interested in, and what, I think, they’re missing, and I really start to build upon that, and it really was the thing I want to separate, being able to give people things they need from our free standpoint with my podcasts and pearls, but then be able to get a little bit more in depth and provide some more value.

[00:06:35] TU: Critical care is certainly not my area of expertise. Emergency medicine, critical care. But I know enough within the profession that this is a topic that certainly there are groups within pharmacy associations. There are large critical care organizations outside of pharmacy that are well respected, and certainly ones that clinicians go to for resources. So, what was the gap that you saw? What was the opportunity that as you looked at those other “competing resources” that were out there, that you felt like, you know what, there’s a gap here that we really have an opportunity to build something that can supplement those resources?

[00:07:09] JP: Absolutely, Tim. So, one of the things that I noticed was that, unfortunately, when you get so big that a lot of the resources are really catered to a large percentage of practitioners. And what I want you to do is figure out what are the things that I need on a day to day basis that are necessarily not there. So, some of the times, I spent a large percentage of my time collecting resources, collecting and organizing resources. And I really wanted to figure out if there was a way for me to have all that in one click, that would save me hours of time. And also, I thought about as a resident, I spent even more time trying to figure out what is actually useful? What do I actually need to read?

So, that was the first thing that came to me with the reference library within PACU, was figuring out what do I need that’s not currently there, and what I spend the majority of my time on as a resident, and then now as a preceptor. So, I started going through different aspects and figuring out is there an easier way, or a more convenient way to organize these resources? And that was like the first step to this. And then I thought myself, how can I make this more all-inclusive, so I don’t have to go to five different websites? Because what I noticed was, I would consume a ton of content, but I had to go to five or six different websites to get that information, or I had to spend a significant amount of money each time I got those things, when I only really wanted one topic or so.

So, that was the basis for me creating a platform that included all of these things, and really helped me understand that maybe there’s a niche there for me to be able to go in and talk about the things that I do, and emergency medicine as being one of the newer specialties, and really build emergency medicine outwards, and go from that, to critical care, to internal medicine. And really, I thought about all of acute care pharmacy, there are certain things that we can build for them that they’re needing, and a lot of the content I build is based off what people send me questions on and things they say that they need. So, that was really the niche that I picked up on.

[00:09:08] TU: Yeah, so valuable information to hear there. It’s one, you’re living it, as a clinician, you went through the training, you feel the pain point yourself, and then I think you mentioned a great point there as well that something that resonates with me at YFP is questions that come in. You start to see themes and repetition, you start to pick up on okay, what are the pieces of content? What are the resources that would be helpful to serve people in the community?

When I take myself back Jimmy to being in pharmacy school, which was a while ago. I graduated 2008 and I remember going through rotations and like critical care was overwhelming. It’s quickly rising, it wasn’t for me. But I remember working with a lot of critical care practitioners and I can see why the resource you’ve built is of such value to them. And you mentioned one thing already that there’s so much information, different resources that are out there, so maybe not something about well as succinct as it could be. And obviously, you’re trying to address that pain point in the academy.

I also, when I think of critical care, I think of the confidence level that’s needed among the practitioners and just the amount of information, the urgency of some of the care situations, time management, just the overall competence of the practitioner. Are those other things that you’re seeing in the community where folks that are interested in your model might be struggling with some of those areas as well?

[00:10:26] JP: Absolutely. And those ways that I’m trying to address that through our community forum, and just be able to have a conversation, because a lot of times where depending on what your practice or depending on where you’re doing your training, you may not have people that you can talk to that’s been through the scenarios that they’re training you on. The patient population may not be big on that. So, a lot of the time, we’re having mentor sessions, and we’re having one of the things I’m working on for next month, is given a class based off resources to use to save you time and organize yourself.

So, all these things, we’re looking at ways and where we can create content for people, not just on the clinical side of things, but also on the site where they are able to organize and to be able to be a little bit more confident, and maybe having one on one conversations with myself, maybe have a one on one conversations with others, and that’s where I think that we’re unique, because we’re small enough to take the needs of our clientele and say, “Okay, what else do you need?” And then I can go and use the podcast. I can go out and use all the other social media platforms that I’ve been successful on to find these people and to give them what they need.

[00:11:34] TU: When I look at your mission, Jimmy, you mentioned to empower healthcare providers with the knowledge and skills they need to provide evidence based safe care for critically ill patients. So, that terminology, healthcare providers, suggests it’s broader than pharmacists. Are you building an interprofessional platform? Is it mostly pharmacists? Tell us more about the demographic of your audience?

[00:11:53] JP: Absolutely. As of right now, the majority of our audience is going to be a pharmacist base. But again, we do have a few nurses, we do have a few physicians. And the ultimate goal is to be inclusive of everyone who utilizes pharmacotherapy to treat patients. So, the big goal, I want this to be something that everyone can use. And we have some different plans for the end of the year in early 2023, where we can provide certain solutions to a medical residency program. There’s an interesting component to where they have, at least for emergency medicine, they have a pharmacotherapy or pharmacology section within their training that needs to be marked off.

As of now, there is not a standard of how to satisfy that. So, the more and more I teach within a residency program, I have a standing position where I teach once a month to our medical residents, I’m noticing they really value that. And what if your residency program doesn’t have a pharmacist? What if you don’t have an EM pharmacist in your program? Eventually, we can get to the point to where we can provide some resources for those practitioners as well. The same thing I get from the NPs and PAs, they want more pharmacy related content from pharmacists actually practicing at the bedside. Now, I think that’s the unique component of where we’re trying to take the platform and grow this to where it can be everyone, but again, we provide you what you need, and create it in such a way that is suitable for that particular person at their time, in their training.

[00:13:20] TU: I think it’s a really interesting niche, the medical residency. Again, you’re living it, you’re teaching and working at a large academic medical center, you work with medical residents, right? So, you can design and customize curriculum and experiences in a way that you know, will be meaningful that have been tested. But to your point, not every medical residency program has access to a pharmacy practitioner. Especially, if you’re looking at something like achievement of goals and objectives within a residency program, it’s a really interesting opportunity. And to further that point, one of the unique aspects as you look at potentially marketing products and services out to residency program directors, is they’re a pretty well-defined market. You can figure out who they are and begin those communications and the network of those folks is relatively small versus blasting out the service more broadly. 

So, tell us more about Pharmacy & Acute Care University. What do you offer? You’ve mentioned a couple things with the reference library, community forum. What are the core offerings of Pharmacy & Acute Care University?

[00:14:23] JP: Absolutely. So, we have a few. Our main ones I’ve mentioned before is the reference library where again, we collect this content and save you time by putting it to where you have a quick review. So, we not only give you the guidelines and a primary articles, we can give you review articles and something that other places and other platforms haven’t included, is the podcasts and blogs that are out there, that are also pretty useful. We get all those things together because we know that our residents, we know that our physicians and PA, NP, are using those blogs. So, why don’t we look at those, examine and see if they’re useful and provide them with something that they’re going to use as well.

[00:14:59] TU: That component of that can be our master classes. This is our traditional course. I think this is something that most people are familiar with, where you go through some modules, you answer a few questions, there are some videos and different multimedia. Again, you can do on your own time, on demand class. The most popular of our platform is going to be the live seminars, and that’s basically you have a live event to where I open this up to everyone, and we can get some continuing education credit for it as well, and we those at least once a month, and that’s again, open to everyone. And then from there, if you want to get access to the slides, you want to get access to recording or continue education, that can be available inside our membership.

And lastly, something that’s new that our audience ask for was literature review. So, where we examine an article every other week, and we’re going to continue to expand this, and we break down an article based on our review. So, we read article, we provide our analysis of what it is and how to utilize that within practice, and we send you a summary of that to your email. So, if you can listen to the five to 10-minute spiel on it, you can. But if you just want to get to the bare bones, and add that to your knowledge, we have a handout that we send you every few weeks that you can just get continually updated information that’s out there in literature.

Lastly, for our more advanced practitioners, and really everyone can use this, is our patient case questions. So, we can provide you information up front, but how do you know if you really know it? Or you think I’m an advanced practitioner, I know these different things. Well, how about you test that knowledge and see if you really do and see if you can do some space retrieval and bring back some things that you highly haven’t studied in maybe a couple of months or even years. So, that’s one of the things that we’ve added on to where – this is why I call, pack you a complete, an all in one platform is simply because we can teach you something, you communicate within the community forum, but you can also test yourself and get continuing education. So, you don’t really have to leave outside of that ecosystem that we’ve created to get almost anything else. And if there is, again, I made it to where we have a wish list within our forum, to where you can put in what you want, and I work on using my network to build those things.

[00:17:10] TU: I love it. It’s such a cool example of how you’ve been able to monetize the clinical expertise, but also be able to fill a gap that’s out there and be able to serve other pharmacists and healthcare professionals with these resources. I want to dissect a little bit of what you’ve done, because I think for many that are listening that say, “Hey, I think I could monetize my clinical expertise.” And that could be building something like you’ve built it, or I’m also thinking about, a shout out to Kelley Carlstrom, at Kelley C., PharmD that has built an incredible community for oncology practitioners. Or it could be somebody that is thinking, “Hey, I want to contribute to a community that already exist.” One like Jimmy has built or one like Kelley has built. But that can be overwhelming to think about building something.

So, I’m looking at your site and you’ve described all of these products and offerings. You’ve talked about a reference library, a masterclass, community forum, live seminars, a membership feature. You’ve talked about literature reviews which you’ve launched more recently. There’s a membership component to login. You’ve talked about a podcast, a blog, a social community, there’s a lot of pieces that are there. And so, the question is not just the time investment, but also, where do I start? Where do I start?

So, if you take yourself back to the beginning of this journey, and obviously you’ve evolved and built this over time, and you have plans to continue to do so as you just mentioned, where did you start from idea to, “Hey, I just want to take one step forward on this path towards building this vision.” What were those first one or two or three steps that you took to build what is now up on the website?

[00:18:42] JP: I think the big thing, particularly when looking at Pharmacy & Acute Care University, and I call it PACU, for short. The first thing that I did was, I knew that I didn’t know much about building this platform. One of the things I did was actually reading a book called Who Not How by Dan Sullivan, and it really opened my mind. Because the first thing I did was read that book, and I realized that I didn’t have to know everything. Once I got out of that fear, it’s more of a mindset shift. So, I think the first step is just figuring out where your mindset currently is. And ask myself, “What do you want to do? Do you want to educate people? Do you want to connect with people?” For me, one of the things that I enjoyed the most was educating. It’s something that I did within residency first, with just doing the pharmacy pearls. And that was something that I just did for the Emory residence, and I just did – on a Friday, I will get a small topic and go from there. And I realized that that was something I really enjoy, and I thought to myself, if there was a way for me to bring that type of information, that feeling that I got to a wide source of people, and if I can make a business around it, would it be something I can do? And I knew at the time I didn’t know how to do that. But I read that book and it was Who Not How, then I realized, I say okay, “Who do I need to know or who knows this type of platform that I can build?” I got a podcast called The Membership Guys and they would talk about how to build their own memberships and I read a book on that. And then they walked me through step by step.

So, I think the mindset was first and then figuring out that there’s other specialists, and that’s what’s the first step for me, just reading a book. The very first step was reading a book and figuring out that I really enjoy educating. So, the book, the mindset change, and just figuring out what at the simplest level, what do you want to do? And for me, it was figuring out a way to educate and connect with people.

[00:20:40] TU: I love that, Jimmy. And the reason I asked that question, and I can remember my own journey is a lot of people will start with an idea. And if you think about this, like a visual of a roller coaster. You ride that energy high of the idea, you’ve got a solution to a problem that you see out there, and then you start to get into the weeds, right? And some people jump into WordPress, some people jump into logos, some people jump into how am I going to price my products or services or offerings, and that is typically where people get hung up, they might get lost, they might get overwhelmed. And I think the advice you give on mindset shift, and even that next step of a book, it was Who Not How by Dan Sullivan. We’ll link to that in the show notes.

But that’s one tangible step, I can read something that can evolve my thought process, it can open up my eyes to before I get into the weeds, who might help me on this journey along the way and make sure that I can keep that momentum going forward. So, my question building on that, Who Not How is as we look at PACU and what you have offered today, I’ve gotten the impression based on our conversation that it’s not just Jimmy, there’s other people that are involved in the business, whether that’s contributors, whether that’s contractors that you’ve worked with, to help you build out the site and other things. Is that fair? And if so, tell me more about the infrastructure of who’s helping you build the community that you have?

[00:21:54] JP: Absolutely. One of the things that I took my – when I first started off, I didn’t want to make this about me. Because again, at some point, I won’t be able to do all aspects of this. And it became very overwhelming when I thought I had to. So, after I read that book, I said, “Okay, who can – I need a website.” So, it’s like, “Okay, who can build a website?” I went through and looked on a free app, I looked on Fiverr, I looked at all these different platforms, and I just interviewed many different people. They got me the first person and I had a good interaction with that. So okay, how can I get more people? I did trial and error of finding different virtual assistants, finding different contributors. And I came to the point to where I said, okay, I have a basis of people who can web design and develop, and the next step was getting someone who can handle some of my more operational task. So, I hired someone on for that.

And then the next big step that I think, is not only going to help me, but I think is going to help the majority of the community is when I started getting guest writers and guest presenters to come on, and people really enjoyed that. What I start to realize is that many people, they want a platform to present. They want a platform to display what they know, because for one reason or the other, if they don’t have a certain credential, or they don’t have a certain – they didn’t go to a certain school, they may have been overlooked for these presentations, because you only have so many national conferences and ways to present, and people need it for the CV, people need it for their own conference, to be honest. So, I started reaching out and say, and ask some people on Twitter, “Hey, who will be interested in contributing to the platform?” And there’s many ways you can do it. Well, do you like to speak or not?

I noticed that there are certain people who just want to get presentations live. And then I noticed there was a group of people who they wanted to contribute, but they really didn’t want to face shown, they really didn’t want to be heard, they really don’t like their voice. I would say that, a little bit over 60% of my platform can be produced with not any voice, not with video and things of that nature, and people really took hold to that. And now, we’re to the point to where we have a rotation of probably 20 to 30 pharmacists that contribute on a platform. And that’s when things really started to take off. Because I started being more from a managerial and more operational standpoint, and being able to assign work, assign task, and really use my platform to connect with people, versus having to worry about creating the content consistently. And that’s really given me some satisfaction in my personal life. I think I’ve been able to meet more people that I wouldn’t have met if I wouldn’t have reached out to them and be contributors.

[00:24:30] TU: That’s a really important evolution in the business. Because I think that as you’re talking about here, you have 20 to 30 plus contributors, and obviously, your time is a finite resource from your sanity, as well as just hours that are in the day. But I would also argue and I think your point about, “Hey, this can’t just be about Jimmy is a really important one.” Because if you’re solving a problem and filling a need that’s out there in the market, your time was eventually going to become a rate limiting step to what you were going to be able to do in terms of the value you were going to provide to the community.

So, I think as you now building out this infrastructure of contributors, obviously, you’re able to begin to expand the work and the reach of that. Let me ask a follow up to that, and I think maybe some folks might be uncomfortable with that span and control. Yes, I get excited about the mission, and the work can move forward, and I’m not always writing them. But am I losing the potentially the quality or the span and control? How do I oversee all this? So, has that been a challenge for you? Or what have been some systems that you built to help with that?

[00:25:32] JP: Absolutely. One of the things that happened initially, I was getting some work done, and I got medical writers that can help with creating some of this content, and I noticed that it just wasn’t up to par from the advanced practitioner. And I noticed a big difference when a pharmacist create my information versus someone who wasn’t necessarily within pharmacy, or I would say, wasn’t an acute care pharmacy. And I noticed that as I’m getting ready to review this information, it was so much that I had to change and I noticed I need someone who gets it. And it’s someone who understands that and maybe the next limiting step was me editing that material.

So, one of the aspects of how I added on, I say, okay, I’m going to have to contributor who make the content, but also have a contributor who’s my editor, who edit this stuff before I see it and get it cleaner, and go back and forth from that standpoint. And that really helped quite a bit because it made me feel more comfortable with that content moving forward, versus me thinking, I had to change that, and I’m already making content as well. So, that was the big step. But it did make me feel a little uncomfortable again, because some of the things that was important to other people, other editors, wasn’t necessarily as important to me. But I realized it may be important to my audience. And that’s where it really became more prevalent that I needed to make sure I empower my editors, I empower my contributors. Because, again, they’re going to be the ones that build this platform to really be something that’s much bigger than what it currently is now.

[00:27:01] TU: So, as I hear you talk about this journey, and the work and the systems and the processes that you’re building now, I think a natural question is, Jimmy, how are you doing this? So, you’re working full time, you’re working in a large academic medical center, you mentioned a teaching component, which anyone who’s been in a shared faculty role, you know that that in and of itself can feel like more than one job. You’re teaching trainees, I suspect, medical residents, pharmacy residents, pharmacy students, medical students. So, how have you been able to balance this or maybe balance isn’t even a thing, as you’re getting it off the ground. But tell us more about the strategies that you’ve employed, to be able to work on this and move the mission forward. But also, make sure that you’re keeping yourself well throughout the journey?

[00:27:43] JP: I think one of the biggest things that came up was, I had some advice to make sure you make systems for everything. And I didn’t necessarily know what that meant, until I started building this. Because again, when you’re by yourself, you’re the system. But when you start to train other people to do a task, and you realize that you have to give very detailed instructions, or you’re going to spend more time revising things. So, I started using, again, everyone has their own productivity manager, I use the platform Click Up, and that’s where I basically have everything lived. So, everything has his own bucket. And within there, everything has their own sub tasks and different checklists to get a single task done, and I’ve worked with my assistant to where some of the more difficult tasks, I would have her go through it, but then create instructions on each step. Pictures and do think different things like that.

So, when I assign this task with someone else, they can go through and pretty easily get those things done. And once I built up a big base of that, I started using it for everything. So, even for, in my role within my course, every class have a certain lesson plan, every class have a certain setup, a certain thing that need to happen. I have made templates for emails I’m going to send. I’ve made templates for – on top of the discussions that I have. So, all these things have their own system now. And now, it’s been a couple of years where most of the – if I’ve done it two or three times, I just spend a little extra time making the system out of it, and I just use that over and over again. So now, it takes to where I can focus my time on creating new platforms and creating new systems, and all the ones I’ve done in the past, I just reuse that. It’s been phenomenal for me in saving time. And again, almost everything that I do now from the production of a podcast, from creating the conference, I’ve done it now more than once, and it’s easier for me to be able to put those things on autopilot, so to say.

[00:29:39] TU: I love that, Jimmy. I did an episode recently, 265 where we talked about – we’ll link to that in the show notes, 10 lessons learned from employed entrepreneur. And that was one of the things that I talked about, because it’s so important as you think about, again, how can this continue to grow and evolve and the question I encourage folks to think about that are beginning as a solopreneur and looking to build out some of the systems is, if you were to walk away for a month, you’re to take a break, something were to happen that you needed a month off, would the business be able to continue to go on and ideally grow in your absence? That question really forces the – okay, what are all the hats that I’m wearing, and are things documented in a manner that someone else can be trained up? And ideally, over time, people are able to take on those roles so that you can continue to move forward and grow the business.

Two books I would recommend on this concept that Jimmy is talking about here, we’ll link to these in the show notes E-Myth Revisited by Michael Gerber. Great book that talks about the concept that that Jimmy just outlined, and then Procrastinate on Purpose by Rory Vaden talks a little bit about this concept as well that I think folks may find helpful.

Jimmy, my last question for you is, given this as a financial podcast, one of the big upsides I see as a side hustle or a business, especially as people are working full time, is it allows them to supercharge and accelerate their financial goals, whether that be debt repayment, saving for the future, having some extra cash on hand, whatever be the case. So, my question is, how has developing PACU, how has that helped you reach or advance your, your financial goals that you’re working on?

[00:31:14] JP: Absolutely. I think one of the big things is during this same timeframe reading and develop myself for this, I’ve learned where it’s the best to place money and how to have money work for you. And the biggest things as additional income start come again, I realized that, okay, I could really look to something to where it can not only supplement income, but potentially with greater success, being able to kind of take over part of that. So, it’s really helped me – the ideal of retirement has completely changed my mind. It used to be an age, but now it’s a number.

So, when I talk to my family, and I talk to everyone around me, there’s a certain number that I had to get to per month, to where I feel that I’ll be comfortable enough to not be full time anymore. I know what that number is, for part time. I know what that number is for 0.75 FTE, and it’s really changed my mindset. So, the biggest benefit to me is understanding that not only can money work for me in other aspects that will benefit from PACU, but it also, is going to allow me more time to spend time with family, to travel, do things of that nature. So, it’s actually given me a different approach to what retirement looks like, and really, to feel comfortable in that space. So, that’s the big thing for me, is spending more time with family, and change the mindset from when to and what that number looks like.

[00:32:35] TU: It’s great stuff, and I think as you talk about, it’s a number, not an age. We’ve talked about that on the show, and one, it gets me excited for your journey is not only is it about being able to spend more time with your family and friends and enjoy the experiences you want, but also connecting to our conversation just a moment ago, because you’re building the systems and processes on where it will go, the mission of what you’re working on, because you’re going to have other folks that are involved. And so, as you’re spending more time with family and friends, and enjoying those experiences, the company, the mission, the work, can still advance, even in your absence. So, this has been awesome. So excited for you, Jimmy and what you have a future in your community. We’ll link again to the PACU website. Where is the best place that listeners can go to find you and to follow your journey?

[00:33:20] JP: I think Twitter is going to be the best place to catch me, where I’m the most active, @PharmD_intheED. That’s where I spend a decent amount of my time. Again, if you’re interested in the PACU platform, we have platforms on all the social media, so LinkedIn, YouTube, Twitter, Facebook, all those things we have platforms there. So again, I’ll be aware of any information that’s coming into those platforms, and Twitter is probably the easiest place to catch me. Again, @PharmD_intheED.

[00:33:47] TU: Awesome. Thank you so much, Jimmy for taking time to come on the show. I appreciate it.

[00:33:51] JP: Tim, it has been an absolute pleasure. Again, we follow you guys for a while and this is something that again, it’s really, I’m looking forward to.

[00:33:57] TU: Thank you

[OUTRO]

[00:33:58] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and it is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog post and podcast is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analysis expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 283: How to Optimize Your Tax Situation with Sean Richards, CPA


YFP Director of Tax, Sean Richards, CPA, EA, talks about how to optimize your tax situation as a pharmacist. He discusses tax basics that every pharmacist should know, the critical distinction between tax planning and tax preparation, and how to prepare for the year-end to put yourself in the position to have a headache-free tax season. 

About Today’s Guest

Sean Richards, CPA, EA, received his undergraduate degree in Corporate Finance and Accounting, as well as his Master of Accountancy, from Bentley University in Waltham, MA. Sean has been a Certified Public Accountant (CPA) since 2015 and received his Enrolled Agent certification earlier this year. Prior to joining the YFP team, Sean was the Senior Treasury Manager at PRA Group, a global debt buyer based in Norfolk, VA. He began his career at American Tower Corporation where, over 10 years, he held several positions in audit, treasury, and accounting. As the Director of YFP Tax, Sean focuses on broadening the company’s existing tax planning and preparation operations, as well as developing and launching new accounting offerings, including bookkeeping, payroll, and fractional CFO services.

Episode Summary

This week on the YFP Podcast, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, welcomes YFP’s Director of Tax, Sean Richards, CPA, to the show to discuss optimizing your tax situation as a pharmacist. During the show, they cover areas for optimization, including tax basics that every pharmacist should know regardless of their income or stage of career. The discussion covers basic tax terminology, the federal income tax formula, and why we don’t have a better understanding of tax fundamentals in general. Sean explains AGI (Adjusted Gross Income), how to calculate AGI, an overview of deductions and credits, and how they differ in their impact on your tax picture. Sean takes a moment to explain the difference between marginal and effective tax rates, how bunching charitable donations can impact tax optimization and the triple tax benefits that exist with HSA Accounts. Sean details the distinction between tax planning and tax preparation with a comparison that listeners will enjoy. The discussion leads to common tax strategies that many pharmacists currently employ to optimize their financial situation and things to look out for to avoid common mishaps and mistakes with tax. Sean answers a question on the Inflation Reduction act, providing examples of tax benefits that listeners might take advantage of, and closes out the episode with ways to prepare for the year’s end and put yourself in a position to have a headache-free tax season. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRO]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

This week, I had the pleasure of welcoming YFP Director of Tax, Sean Richards, onto the show to talk about how to optimize your tax situation as a pharmacist. During the show, we discuss tax basics that every pharmacist should know, regardless of income or stage of career, the important distinction between tax planning and tax preparation, some common tax strategies that pharmacists are employing to optimize their financial situation, things to be on the lookout for where there’s common mishaps and mistakes, and finally how to prepare for the year end to put yourself in the position to have a headache-free tax season. 

Now, at YFP, we know that filing your taxes and figuring out how to optimize your tax situation can be stressful and overwhelming, and that’s why YFP Tax is opening up its tax planning services to more pharmacist households this year. Unlike other firms, YFP Tax isn’t focused on just completing your return. Rather they provide value care and attention to you and your taxes. Because they work specifically with pharmacists, they are familiar with aspects of your financial plan that have an impact on your taxes like student loans, benefit packages, side hustles, and more. You can visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/tax to learn more and to join the waitlist for the 2022 filing season. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/tax. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:29] TU: Sean, welcome to the show.

[00:01:30] SR: Thanks for having me. I’m glad to be here.

[00:01:33] TU: Excited to have you officially part of the YFP team, leading our tax team and efforts. I know some folks listening may not be aware of who is Sean and what is he doing, as it relates to the YFP team. So give us a brief intro to, Sean, some your background and the work that you’re doing with YFP Tax.

[00:01:52] SR: Sure, yeah. So I mean, I wouldn’t be surprised that people haven’t seen my face yet. But it’s crazy because I’ve only been here for about three months, and I feel like I’ve met so many people and done so many things. It’s been awesome. But, yeah, I’m Sean Richards. So I’m the Director of Tax at YFP Tax, CPA, EA, my most recent certification there. So for those who don’t know, EA is an enrolled agent. It’s the IRS certification. It kind of gives you a leg up with talking to the IRS. 

Like I said, I’ve only been with the YFP team for a few months now. I worked at a large corporate for a while. They’re doing audit, accounting, treasury, a couple of different functions there. I briefly had another job before this. But, yeah, now I’m leading the YFP Tax team. So we have some tax offerings that we focus on, sort of more direct to consumer, where we’re doing prep tax planning, some of the things we’ll be talking about during this call. 

Then we also have a completely different sort of bookkeeping, payroll, all the way up to fractional CFO services, if you’re doing more of the side business or small business type thing. So, yeah, I’m really excited to be here and be part of the team.

[00:02:55] TU: Yeah. We also are excited, grateful to have you on board. It’s been fun to see the momentum of the work that you’ve been doing in just a couple months. It feels longer than that and that’s –

[00:03:05] SR: I said the same thing but in a good way, not a bad way. It feels longer but because it’s been a lot of good fulfilling work, not in a bad way.

[00:03:12] TU: You’re going to be hearing a lot more from Sean on the podcast and webinars, probably on the blog as well. As we’ve talked about on the show many times, tax is such an important part of the financial plan, one of the reasons that we’ve brought these services in house, so we can make sure that the financial plan is humming with the tax plan. Because of that, we’re going to be focusing on even more content than we have done in the past, as it relates to tax strategy and tax planning. 

The theme of this show today is really how to optimize as a pharmacist your tax situation. Our hope is whether you’re just getting started as a new practitioner, whether you’re mid-career, whether you’re further along in your career, maybe retirements on the rise in that. Regardless, you’ll be able to take one or two things away that you can apply to your situation, right? Whether we like it or not, taxes ain’t going away, right? It’s not like student loans where we pay them off and they’re gone. This is something we need to be thinking about throughout our career and how we can optimize. As Tim Baker says, we want to pay our fair share but no more. So we’re going to talk about how we can best optimize our tax situation. 

The first thing, Sean, is really understanding the tax basics. We’re going to talk about some specific formulas and terms that we need to make sure we understand, so we can appropriately prioritize that as a part of the plan. But first off, why are most of us, myself included, deficient in our basic tax understanding, right? We should all, I feel like, have a more foundational understanding, especially since we’ve got to pay these every year. Why don’t we have that?

[00:04:45] SR: Well, we could probably have a completely separate hour-long conversation about lobbying and all sorts of things from that standpoint. But, I mean, I think it really comes down to, I mean, I’m a product of the public school system, and I didn’t learn about taxes in school. I feel like it’s something where it’s just some schools might offer basic finance classes and how to open up a credit card or something. 

But taxes is something that doesn’t really come up. It’s one of those things that you just sort of join the workforce, and all of a sudden it’s expected that you’ll know what to do. Or you’ll have a guy or your dad or somebody will have a guy who can do it for you. But, I mean, I went to a business school, and it wasn’t even until my third year or so that I even took a tax class, where you kind of get into some of this stuff. 

So it really is something that isn’t fundamental as part of the education system here. As unfortunate as that may be, that’s why I’m hoping that I can kind of give some background to folks, so they’re not completely lost when it comes to the end of the year.

[00:05:35] TU: Yeah. I don’t think it’s a super exciting topic. Even in Econ 101, like we did some fun investing games and other things. I don’t remember learning about tax. Or maybe we did, and I just zoned out. But it certainly isn’t ever present in our educational system. I’m trying to teach my boys a little bit about taxes right now, and I’m having very little success. Hopefully, Sean, maybe they’ll hear your voice and listen a little bit closer. 

Let’s start with the federal income tax formula. How do we ultimately get to the final number of what we either owe or we receive back as a refund? Why is it so important that we understand this formula?

[00:06:12] SR: One of the reasons why it’s so important is that a lot of these terms get thrown around interchangeably, or they’re used as buzzwords. You’ll be hearing car commercials, and you hear kind of REITs and all these different things thrown out there. Everything’s sort of used interchangeably. So if you don’t really understand how the basic formula works, you might misinterpret something, or you might think that somebody’s talking about something that they’re not talking about. 

The basic formula is you have your income. You take out anything that’s tax-free, so things like municipal bond interest, something like that. Then you have your gross income, so not adjusted gross income, your gross income. Then we have what we call above the line deduction. So some of those would be like IRA contributions, things like that. Those are the what we call above the line because the magic line is what gets you to that AGI. 

Once you take out those above the line deductions, you get to what I just referred to, the magic number of AGI, which is an important one, and we’ll get to it in a little bit. But, I mean, that’s something where a lot of different phase outs and things kind of come into play. So that’s a really important number to have in the back of your mind.

[00:07:13] TU: Yeah. I think if folks, Sean, can really look at their tax returns, again not super exciting, right? But if you look at the 1040, if you start to understand some of these terms, and you can visualize like these above the line types of things, all of a sudden, the strategy pieces start falling into play, correct?

[00:07:30] SR: Yeah, exactly. A lot of people just have their tax return. They hand a box to their accountant. At the end of the year, he says you owe this much, or you’re getting this much in a refund. You say awesome, shake their hand, and you’re done. But all the things I’m talking about right now, I mean, your return could be 100 pages long. But if you look at that front page, you’ll be able to see these numbers that I’m talking about to at least give you a better understanding of how some of these things work. 

Once you have your AGI, then we get into deductions. I want to be careful here because this is one of those ones that gets very often thrown around interchangeably. So deductions, which can either be itemized or the standard deduction, depending on which one’s larger in your individual circumstance, are, what, take your AGI and get you down to the taxable income. That’s what actually ends up getting multiplied by your tax rate at the end of the day. So those are things to get you to your taxable income amount. 

Then you multiply by whatever your tax rate is. So there’s marginal rates and stuff, which I’m sure we’ll talk about in a little bit. But you take your taxable income, multiply it by your tax rate, and that gets you to what you theoretically will owe or what you’ll get back. Then we get into what we call credits. Those are, again, kind of used interchangeably or often confused with deductions. 

Credits dollar for dollar reduce what you owe at the end of the day. Whereas a deduction reduces your taxable income, you’re really only saving 30%, whatever your tax rate is on that deduction amount. So if someone says, “Oh, I’ll write it off,” you’re only really saving the times your tax rate portion of that. A credit is dollar for dollar. So if you’re able to take advantage of credits, you can really have a big impact on reducing what you owe at the end of the day.

[00:09:07] TU: Awesome. So you defined well deduction versus credit. Again, as folks are listening, pull up your tax return. Again, I think as you visualize this, it starts to come to life a little bit more. Let’s break down further AGI, and then I want to come back to marginal and effective tax rates, two terms that you threw around that are important that folks have a good understanding of. 

AGI, adjusted gross income, tell us more about that in detail. This comes up all the time, right? You saw this recently with some of the debt cancellation news. What’s your AGI? We talk about it as relates to different strategies with how we invest or how we save. What is AGI and why is it so important?

[00:09:43] SR: So AGI, again, is your gross income. So that would be your income less any of the non-taxable stuff like municipal bond, just like I mentioned. Less those above the line deductions. So that would be things like student loan interest deductions, contributions to the HSAs, traditional IRAs, things like that. That’s what gets you to that AGI. Why AGI is so important is because, like you just mentioned, a lot of different policies or different credits or things like that are based on that number. So they’ll say, “Hey, you’re eligible for this credit if you’re in this AGI range. Or if you exceed this AGI, you’re no longer eligible for this credit.” 

PSLF student loan relief is a big one. So they’ll say, “Hey, you’re eligible for this if your AGI is within this range or under this amount.” So that’s why it’s really important to have that number. Of all the numbers, that’s probably the most important one to have, just sort of handy when you’re looking at these different things.

[00:10:36] TU: How about your marginal versus effective tax rates? What’s the difference and, again, why is this important to understand?

[00:10:42] SR: So marginal is – When people say tax bracket, that’s usually what they mean. They mean marginal when they’re talking about that. So that’s where you’re sitting there, and you’re saying, “Oh, I’m in the 25% tax bracket. If I make another dollar, I’m going to be in the next tax bracket. I can’t make any more money. I’m going to owe more taxes.” So it doesn’t really work out that way because for each of these different brackets, you’re being taxed at the marginal rate for that particular bracket. If you average that out, that’s your effective rate at the end of the day. If you take what you actually owe in taxes versus what your income is and do a simple mathematical equation, you get your effective rates of what you truly are paying. 

Again, when you’re looking at your marginal rate in your bracket, that’s important for things like deduction. So if you say, “Hey, if I’m going to take this deduction,” if you want to do a quick calculation of what that would be for a dollar value for you, you multiply that by your marginal rate. But if you’re really thinking about it saying, “Oh, I don’t want to make any more money. It’s going to put me into the next bracket,” you got to really think about your effective rate when it comes to something like that.

[00:11:43] TU: Yeah. Usually, we want to be careful about not making more money because of taxes, right? So if we’re making more money and we’re paying taxes, that’s not necessarily a bad thing, right? We want to –

[00:11:52] SR: It’s a good thing. 

[00:11:53] TU: It’s a good thing. 

[00:11:54] SR: Some would argue that the more money you pay in taxes, the better that you’re actually doing at the end of the day, despite what anybody would say about trying to cheat the system or anything. You tax bill shows how healthy your finances are.

[00:12:06] TU: Yeah. [inaudible 00:12:07] and I wrote a book recently that he makes an argument that your number one KPI, key performance indicator, is the amount of taxes you pay to the IRS each year. I think the point is a good one, right? Obviously, you want to optimize and be as tax-efficient as possible. But if we’re able to earn more money, we’re paying more taxes. Again, that’s not a bad thing. That’s the first bucket here, understanding the tax basics. 

The second thing, Sean, is tax planning versus tax preparation. It’s something we have talked about on the show before but I think, honestly, something we can’t talk enough about because we confuse sometimes the filing versus the actual strategic look, as it relates to the tax planning and how we can optimize that as part of the plan. I’ve heard you presented this talk before and give a really cool example of a film director and a film editor, and how that helps highlight the difference between the two, tax planning and tax preparation. Tell us more.

[00:13:01] SR: Yeah. So it’s actually kind of what you were just saying, where you want to pay your fair share. The more you pay in tax at the end of the day, whatever your tax bill is, it kind of shows that you’re doing better, right? But at the same time, you don’t want to pay more than your fair share. You don’t want to pay more than you need, just because you’re not paying attention or for whatever reason. 

The way I like to think of it is tax planning is like a film director. So film director is watching the actors. They can affect change as they go. They have kind of an idea of what they want at the end of the day. If something goes wrong, they can say, “Ah, let’s take that back. Let’s change that.” Or, “I don’t like the way that that worked. I have this other vision in my head. Let’s do that.” Whereas a film editor, equally as important in the film production process, but they’re basically getting film that’s already been recorded. They’re saying, “All right, now work your magic and make this look good.” Of course, they can do a lot. They’re professionals. They can tweak it. They can make it look beautiful. But they can’t go back and change what’s already happened in the past, right?

Even though it’s an important piece, that tax preparation piece is really only a historical look back. It’s not something where like the tax planning, the director side, you can actually make changes throughout the course of the year and have those kind of play into the final product. So that’s the way I like to look at it.

[00:14:13] TU: Yeah, especially if you think about the timeline of filing your taxes mid-April. We’re already a quarter-plus into the New Year. So even when we file – Even if at that point, we’re starting to think ahead and more strategically, we’re already beginning to put a dent in that year. So, yes, we’ve got to file, right? Or else the IRS can come knocking on our doors. But better yet, we’re doing some of the strategy, the look ahead, the planning as the year is going on, and we’re being more proactive than just the filing alone. Then we’re not only optimizing but, hopefully, also minimizing any surprises. 

[00:14:47] SR: Exactly, yeah. You don’t want surprises. You want to be able to take a look at things in the middle of the year and say, “Hey, where am I going to be come filing time? Or where am I even going to be a couple years from now down the line?”

[00:14:56] TU: I’ve seen you present on this before, where you give an example. Obviously, there’s many ways that tax planning can help optimize, but one example being around how one might bunch their charitable giving to help optimize how efficient that tax is in that given year. So talk to us a little bit further about that example. It’s just one of many examples of how someone might optimize your tax strategy.

[00:15:21] SR: That’s a perfect example to give right now because, like you just said, we’re getting towards the end of the year. So someone might say, “Well, if tax planning at this point isn’t really going to make much of a difference, maybe I’ll start next year or something.” But with something like bunching, that’s something that can be affected at the end of the year, up till the last day. So that’s something where if you’re looking at things and you’re saying, “Well, all right. I’m taking the center deduction this year, but I’m really close to being able to itemize my deductions.” So some people might just do what they’re normally going to do and just take whatever they get, whether it’s a standard deduction or itemized. 

But if you’re going to be donating to charity for an example, and you know that you want to give, say, $10,000 over the course of the next couple years, you could break that into 5,000 this year and 5,000 next year, whatever. But if you look at it and you say, “Hey. Well, what if I bring some of these charitable contributions into this year and maybe be able to take advantage of itemizing my deductions? And then in a future year maybe not give that money and take the standard deduction?” 

That’s something where you could make that donation on December 31st, and it’s effectively like given 5,000 on December 31st and given 5,000 on January 1st. But from a tax standpoint, it can make a really big impact. So that’s something where that tax planning, that directorial thing really comes into play, where if you look at those things and think about the impacts that will have down the line, even where you don’t change any of the facts and how much money you’re actually going to give, it can make a big difference.

[00:16:43] TU: That’s one tax strategy to employ a good example of where the tax planning can really be helpful the more strategic look ahead versus just the filing alone. Let’s shift into the third area here, which is common tax strategies to employ. Certainly not an exhaustive list, right? There’s many, many, many different strategies. It’s, of course, customized and individualized to one’s personal situation. But let’s talk about a few common ones that we see. Let’s start with the HAS, Sean. What is it? If folks are kind of new to that term, what are some of the tax benefits? Who qualifies, contribution limits? Give us the lowdown on the HSA.

[00:17:18] SR: HSA is great. That’s one where if I had a time machine, I’d go back and tell myself to get involved in those more. It’s something where I just didn’t really hear much about it. Or even if I did, it was something where I’d say, “Well, I’m young. I don’t have a lot of health expenses or anything. I’m not going to really worry about that.” But HSAs are great because they’re one of the few vehicles that have a triple tax benefit. So any of your contributions are going to be tax-free. The growth of those contributions will be tax free. Then when you actually go and make your distributions on it, those are tax-free. 

Basically, what it is, it’s sort of like an IRA, where you put money in, and you can take distributions on it. Until you get to retirement age, you can only use those distributions for medical expenses. But it’s something where, again, it’s just a different type of investment vehicle for you. So if you have medical expenses that you can use now, great. If not, well, maybe not great, but it’s a good way to use it. If not, then you let it grow. When you reach retirement age, you take it out. 

Anybody can contribute, as long as they’re enrolled in a high-deductible health plan. The limits are pretty similar to IRAs. I think in 2022, it’s 3,650 for individuals, and then double for married folks. There’s no limit based on how much you make. Well, there’s the limits that I just mentioned, but there’s no phase outs or anything like that. So if you make too much money, you don’t disqualify yourself, so definitely a great vehicle to take advantage of.

[00:18:41] TU: Yeah. Sean, we see this a lot with our community, I think, for good reasons. One being you just mentioned, right? So higher income professionals, especially if they have a joint household income, where they may be phased out of other opportunities, this is not one of them. Then depending on what they’re thinking of this, either use of short-term known healthcare expenses so that they can optimize and save a little bit on taxes or using it more in that long-term savings vehicle to also optimize the tax benefits. 

We’ve talked about this on the podcast before, but we’re going to keep talking about it because we still see a lot of pharmacists that aren’t taking advantage of this. Given that there’s more and more high-deductible health plans that are being offered that people are opting into because of the rising costs of health care expenses, I think we’re going to see this even more popular in the future than it is today. 

So Episode 165, we talked about the power of an HSA. We’ll link to that in the show notes. We also have a blog post, why I’m not using my HSA to pay for medical expenses. That talks more about the strategy side of using the HSA as a long-term investing vehicle. We’ll link to that blog post as well in the show notes. 

Next up, Sean, for common tax strategies is the IRA. Talk to us a little bit. We’ve covered this in detail on the show, but just traditional versus Roth and some of the strategy around the IRA side of things.

[00:19:57] SR: Yep. I won’t go too much into this because I’ve listened to the podcast before. I know it comes up often. But basically, the two differences here are your traditional IRA, your Roth IRA. So the traditional is something where your contributions you’re making now, you’re taking a tax deduction on it now. Then in the future, when you take it out, you’ll have to pay taxes on it. Roth is the opposite. So you do not get the deduction now. But then when you go to take the money out in the future, when you reach retirement age, it will be tax-free. 

With that, that one’s really one where you want to sit down with your financial planner or whoever is kind of coming up with the financial strategy and really determine where am I going to be in the future? What’s my tax bracket going to look like there versus what’s my tax bracket going to look like now? It gets into that whole planning versus preparation thing I was talking about before. So there’s a lot to unpack there. 

Like I said, similar as the HAS, so there’s a $6,000 limit. I think it goes up to 7,000 if you’re over 50. So you get a little bit of a catch up there if you’re older. But, yeah, no, just another one to take advantage of definitely. You should be making sure that with all of these, that you’re looking at what you’re – If your employer has any benefits and stuff and really try to take advantage of all these.

[00:21:01] TU: Yeah. Both of these HAS, IRA are great examples, where if the financial plan is humming with the tax plan, we can really start to think about this strategically, rather than we’re filing taxes here, and then we’re looking at the financial plan over there.

[00:21:14] SR: Yeah. It’s something that definitely should be married together. 

[00:21:16] TU: Third area, I want to talk about the common tax strategies and the Inflation Reduction Act. You and I are not here to debate whether or not the Inflation Reduction Act is actually going to reduce inflation. But rather, we’re here to talk about what are some of the opportunities and the credits that folks might be able to take advantage as a part of the Inflation Reduction Act. 

So hit us with the highlights of some of the things around the energy-efficient homes or Residential Clean Energy Credit and the Clean Vehicles Credit that folks may or may not already be aware of.

[00:21:44] SR: Yep. So I will try not to use too many of the different names for these because I know that they keep changing. So if I say it now, I’m sure by the time this airs, they’ll have some new fancy name for it. But basically, there’s three areas to highlight. So there’s sort of the more traditional home improvement type energy credit stuff. That’s things like installing new doors and windows on your house that are more energy-efficient, which is almost anything nowadays that’s coming out. But that’s something. 

So people might be familiar with the $500 lifetime credit. That’s where that used to kind of sit. Going forward, that’s going to be a $1,200 annual credit on your taxes. Remember, credits dollar for dollar reduce your taxes. So if you’re thinking – And this goes into effect next year, so something just to kind of keep in mind with planning ahead and everything. But if you’re thinking about getting some energy-efficient renovations done on your place, that’s definitely a big one to keep in mind. 

Even more on top of that, so if you’re not only thinking about, hey, let me get some new windows or something, but why don’t I throw some solar onto that or get some geothermal heating systems or anything, something like that going, so the Residential Clean Energy Credit, that recently bumped up to 30% of whatever your expenses are in that regard. Again, say you’re putting new solar panels outside. You can get a 30% tax credit on the cost to install that equipment, which is huge. 

Especially, again, if you’re planning ahead, you can maybe knock down some of your withholding. So if you know you’re going to have kind of a bigger tax bill at the end of the year, but you have this large project to offset, it’s something really to keep in mind there. Then the clean vehicles one, so there’s a lot to unpack there. I won’t get into too many of the details. But basically, they’ve expanded the credits available for buying electric vehicles or energy-efficient vehicles. 

The biggest one that I’d like to highlight there is going forward they’re actually going to start allowing a credit on previously-owned vehicles. So that’s something where in the past, you had to buy a new car, and I’m sure a lot of people want to buy a nice brand new Tesla but might not have been able to jump into that or afford it right away. So opening up that secondary market to be able to take advantage of the tax credits is going to be huge. 

There are some restrictions on that. If you’re buying a new car, definitely make sure there’s some restrictions around the car being assembled in North America and avoiding some of the mineral countries and stuff. So definitely go out and take a look. We can link to that in the show notes as well. The IRS has specific guidance on that, but those three are definitely some big areas to look forward to going forward.

[00:24:12] TU: Great stuff. I think there’s been a lot of news and potentially some confusion around that. So awesome, brief summary on what folks may be looking out for and how they can take advantage of those credits. The fourth area, as we continue this discussion on how to optimize your tax situation, is some things to be on the lookout for, perhaps some common mishaps or stumbling blocks along the way. 

The first one, Sean, may not apply to a huge percentage of our community listening, but we do have a handful of folks that work in the biopharmaceutical industry or in situations, where restricted stock units or employee stock purchase programs may be a thing, and so it’s worth talking a little bit further about. But what are some of the things that folks should be thinking about if RSUs or if ESPP does apply?

[00:25:00] SR: Yeah. So you’d be surprised. I mean, I’ve done some webinars and some speaking events. Even though it might only apply to a small percentage of people, the people who does apply to it really does kind of nail home because there’s a lot of, I don’t want to say, hidden tax confusion there. But it’s something where you’re excited you’re getting a bonus, you’re getting these restricted stock units, and you want to get in the market. People are all excited about Robinhood and everything. But you have to be careful because there might be some things that you might not be considering. 

With RSUs, you definitely want to make sure that when you’re selling your shares at the end of the day, when your shares vest, oftentimes you will actually recognize income when those shares vest. So taking a very, very quick step back, restricted stock units is usually something where a company will say, “Hey, we’re going to give you 40 shares, but it vests over a four-year period of 25% a year.” So when they vest, normally, you’ll recognize income on that. So what you want to make sure is that you’re not double counting that. When you’re going to sell those shares, make sure that that piece has been picked up already, and you’re not kind of picking it up again. 

Similarly, with employee stock purchase programs, ESPPs, another great thing to take advantage of if it exists for you, usually, what that is is a company, if you work for a publicly traded company, allowing you to buy into the company at a discount. What you want to keep in mind there is that oftentimes, when you buy it at that discount, that discounted price, say, it’s 15% of the market value, that will often come on your W2 as income as well. 

Again, it’s something else that you want to keep in mind. Make sure when you’re paying capital gains on that at the end of the day that you’re backing that piece out. They’ll often be what they call a supplemental form that comes with your 1099. So make sure that you look at that and adjust your basis or work with your accountant. I know I’m probably going over a lot of people’s heads, but make sure you find that piece of paper and give it to your accountant. So they know, hey, I need to adjust this basis and not pay additional on that income that you already were taxed for, right? You don’t want to pay twice in the same money. 

[00:26:55] TU: Yeah. This is something, Sean, we see, as you mentioned, a lot of interest and attention, especially from folks that may be doing fellowship programs or others, looking at job offers, trying to understand what do these terms mean, and then how do they strategize around them, of course, the tax considerations that you mentioned. 

The other area to talk about, as we continue discussing things to be on lookout for, cryptocurrency transactions. I know this was something that our tax team spent a lot of time on during the previous filing season. We saw rapid growth in folks that were investing in cryptocurrency, making transactions. Maybe that slowed up a little bit, just because of what’s been going on in the market. Maybe it hasn’t. But nonetheless, this is reaching more and more people out there that may be dabbling into cryptocurrency. 

So we’re not going to talk about the strategy around cryptocurrency but here specifically about some of the tax considerations. Tell us more.

[00:27:47] SR: Yeah. So the thing to keep in mind with crypto is that – And I just talked about ESPP and RSUs, and that might, to some people, sound complicated. You get into capital gains and all that stuff. Cryptocurrency, the IRS considers that to be property, just like stocks. So if you’re going to the store and you’re buying a coffee with cryptocurrency, you’re effectively, at least to the IRS, going and selling like a share, right? Then buying your coffee. So every time you do that, there’s capital gains or losses associated with it, every single transaction. 

It’s something to keep in mind. I mean, I’m not discouraging anybody or giving anybody advice on whether to use it to buy a coffee or not. But something to keep in mind at the end of the year, you’re going to have to report on each one of those transactions. Some of the crypto software out there doesn’t readily print out that stuff for you, so you might have to use a third party to do it. 

The other thing to keep in mind is that NFTs are another kind of hot topic. I know that IRS has recently – I actually think that the 1040 this year, right on the front page, is going to have a little checkbox like they did last year with crypto saying, “Hey, did you buy or dispose of any digital assets?” So something else to keep in mind, NFTs are a hot topic, but it’s something that you actually have to record all those transactions. If you had a gain, you have to pay taxes on them.

[00:29:00] TU: Yeah. I wonder if anyone at the IRS 5 years ago, 10 years ago would have predicted having questions front and center on the 1040 about cryptocurrency and NFTs. But here we are, right? So obviously, there’s a lot more attention for good reasons that’s been given to those transactions, and I would say our tax team learned a lot through the tax season last year on this, just working with clients and kind of working through some of these issues. So if cryptocurrency transactions were something that was a part of your planning, something that we may be able to assist with. 

[00:29:30] SR: Yeah, absolutely. 

[00:29:31] TU: Sean, the last thing I want to talk about here on things to be on the lookout for is something we commonly see, which is paying the right amount of tax throughout the year. Especially important for those that maybe have significant changes in income, changes in dependents, maybe for those that are earning additional income, side hustle, business. Really, what we’re talking about here is whether or not we need to adjust withholdings or set aside some money for tax throughout the year, if that’s not being taken out of our paychecks. So what are some of those considerations around estimating and being able to estimate our taxes due throughout the year, so we’re not surprised come the filing season?

[00:30:08] SR: Yeah. So this goes back to what I was saying before, where you really want to keep the whole tax planning throughout the course of the year in mind. You don’t want to commit to at the end of the year and have a large bill or have even a large refund at the end of the day. I mean, it’s always nice getting cash back. But at the end of the day, it’s an interest-free loan that you’ve given to the government. So you want to avoid that. 

One of the things you want to do, like I said, is sort of project it out and see what you’re going to owe at the end of the day and decide whether you need to withhold any additional interchanger withholdings or make estimated payments. So one thing you can do, it’s called the safe harbor. So if you look at last year’s return and look at what you actually owed at the end of the day – Sorry, not actually owed at the end of the day in taxes but what your tax bill was. Your tax liability, I should say. 

So whether you had a refund or not, what your tax liability actually was, if you multiply that by 1.1, so 110% of that, and you make sure that whether you’re making payments to the IRS or just having regular withholdings from your W – For your regular paycheck. If you get that money into the IRS by the end of the year, you will avoid having to pay any additional penalties. Now, you might actually owe tax at the end of the day, but you won’t have any penalties. We call that the safe harbor amount saying, “Hey, that’s what I owed last year. 110% of that, we’re good to go.” 

One thing – So if you have a side gig and you’re not having money taken out of your paycheck is you might have to actually make estimated taxes. So there’s a schedule on that. It’s a quarterly schedule. But it’s something – Again, you want to take a look at your calculation and say, “Hey, if money is not being taken out my paycheck, I need to put this money aside and actually send it into the IRS on a regular basis.” 

So the way I like to look at it is think of your friend who’s the most financially irresponsible. If they didn’t have money taken out of their paycheck at the end of the day, would they be able to cover it at the end of the year? Probably not. So something you want to keep in mind.

[00:31:59] TU: Yeah. This is another reason. I think when you’re working with someone effectively throughout the year and planning and being more strategic, someone can help you with estimating what these payments will be. Obviously, especially for those that are earning additional income, side hustle, business, whatever, we want to make sure we’re doing that, and we’re looking at the overall financials of the business and accounting for the taxes that we’re going to owe. 

Sean, as we wrap up here with our fifth and final point, preparing for the year end, great timing as we’re getting ready to turn the calendar into December. Hopefully, it’s the time of year we’re starting to think about our taxes more intentionally. Hopefully, if we’ve done our job here, people are going to be thinking about this all the way throughout the year. So what are some of the year-end things that folks should be thinking about to ensure that they can minimize the stress and headaches that may otherwise come during the tax filing season?

[00:32:49] SR: Yeah. So it’s a lot of the things that I talked about before, right? Especially what I even just ended at, you want to look at your income, your taxes, your withholdings. Kind of project that out and say, “All right, here’s what I think I’m going to owe at the end of the day. Here’s what I’ve withheld. Here are the estimated payments that I made, and am I going to be in a good spot?” Maybe I am. I mean, at this point, there’s not a whole lot you can do from withholding standpoint. But you can change that going forward. You can make estimated payments now. So you want to do that. You want to make sure you maximize your HSA contributions, IRA, any of those types of things. So make sure you’re taking advantage of anything, any benefits that your employers are giving in that regard. 

If you’ve over contributed, so those limits I mentioned before, if you’ve gone over that, make sure to correct those. Take that cash back out or re-characterize them for next year because, otherwise, you’ll end up getting penalties on those. If you are able to contribute to charity, make sure you have a conscious strategy regarding that. You can use donor-advised funds, which we didn’t get into. But it’s kind of like mutual funds for charitable contributions. Think about your capital gains, so things I just mentioned. If you’re sitting there going, “Oh, my goodness. I’ve been buying coffee every day with crypto,” you got to kind of think about that, and maybe go back, and take a look, and see what your gains were or your losses might have been on those, and think about how to apply those going forward. 

Then just make sure you have all of your documentation ready to go and saved down and everything. Then just decide what you’re going to do, or you’re going to do it yourself. Do you want to reach out and hire somebody to prepare your taxes for you? Or better yet, reach out to somebody who can actually be a partner throughout the course of the year and give you more of that guidance and really align your tax strategy with the rest of your financial strategy like it should be.

[00:34:27] TU: Great stuff, Sean. For those that have listened to this episode or have followed us for some time and this concept of year round planning from a tax standpoint, if that really resonates with you and really aligning your taxes in a more strategic, proactive, look ahead way, yes, of course, we’ll do the filing. But we really want to be a partner with you throughout the year so that we can optimize that situation and employ much of what we talked about here. Really, we just, I think, scratched the surface on some of this as well. 

If you’re interested in working with Sean and his team over at YFP Tax, you can visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/tax. There, you can learn more about the services. You can sign up to join the waitlist for the 2022 filing season. As well, you can also reach out to Sean directly if you have a question, [email protected]

Sean, thanks so much for coming on the show and looking forward to having you involved in future episodes as well.

[00:35:21] SR: Yeah. Thanks for having me. I’m looking forward to it as well and looking forward to getting into tax season, hearing from some of the listeners. So have a good one. 

[00:35:28] TU: Awesome. Thank you. 

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:35:30] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 282: The Top 10 Mistakes First-Time Homebuyers Make


Nate Hedrick, The Real Estate RPh and co-host of the YFP Real Estate Investing Podcast discusses the top ten mistakes first time homebuyers make.

Episode Summary

On this episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, welcomes Nate Hedrick, The Real Estate RPh, back to the show to discuss the top 10 mistakes that first-time home buyers commonly make and how you can avoid them. In their discussion, Nate shares a brief market update since his last appearance and details how market changes have impacted him as a real estate investor looking for new opportunities in the current environment. Next, Tim and Nate go through the top 10 mistakes first-time home buyers make in a rapid-fire style, elaborating on each of the common themes plus some insight on how to avoid them when shopping for your first home. 

The Top 10 Mistakes include:

  1. Letting the Bank Set the Budget
  2. Rushing In
  3. Comparing Your Rent Payment to Your Mortgage Payment
  4. Assuming You Need 20% Down
  5. Skipping the Pre-approval
  6. Waiving a Home Inspection
  7. Overlooking the Big-ticket Items
  8. Making a Large Purchase Before Closing
  9. Forgetting to Lock in Your Interest Rate
  10. Skipping Out on the Proper Team

Listeners will learn how best to position themselves for their first home purchase and the critical role a real estate agent plays in the process. 

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRO]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

This week, I had the chance to welcome back a friend of the show, Nate Hedrick, the Real Estate RPH, and cohost of the YFP Real Estate Investing Podcast. On today’s episode, we talk about top 10 mistakes that first-time homebuyers make.

Now, we know that buying a home or investment property is certainly an exciting experience, but also can feel overwhelming at times. Between finding an agent, securing your financing, and actually searching for a property, it’s hard to know where to get started. That’s why we’ve teamed up with my guest today, Nate Hedrick, the Real Estate RPH, to provide a simple solution to jumpstart your home buying process. Through this concierge service, Nate will help you craft a plan, connect with a local agent you trust, and stay by your side throughout the process to lend an ear or helping hand. 

You can learn more about the free concierge service with Nate and book a call by visiting yourfinancialpharmacist.com. Click on home buying at the top and then find an agent. Again, yourfinancialpharmacist.com. Click on home buying and then find an agent. Okay, let’s jump on an interview with Nate Hedrick, the Real Estate RPH. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:15] TU: Nate, welcome back to the show. 

[00:01:16] NH: Hey, Tim. Always great to be here.

[00:01:18] TU: Glad to have you back. It’s been a while. Episode 268, we had you on the show. At the time, we talked about how interest rates, inflation, and market insanity are impacting homebuyers. Here we are, just a couple weeks later. Interest rates have gone up even more since that point, and I want to get a pulse from you on what you’re seeing out there in the market, before we talk about some of the common mistakes that we see with our first-time homebuyers.

[00:01:43] NH: Yeah. Obviously, the interest rate increases have been significant since we last talked, and it’s affecting the market in different ways. Again, I’m only one piece of the broader country that is the market because it’s different everywhere. But in my neck of the woods, in both my personal investing and with my clients that are buying homes or investing in homes, is that the interest rates are hurting, right? It’s really raising that monthly payment. So it’s affecting people’s budget. It’s affecting their ability to purchase, in some cases. 

I’ve had investors completely back out of deals because a couple months down the road now, it’s – Nothing makes sense any longer in terms of the buying price. So it’s making some waves there. On the flip side, though, demand is still high because there aren’t a lot of sellers that are ready to release their properties. Just like we talked about previously, if you’re locked in right now at three or three and a half percent, what’s the use in selling, just to go grab seven percent somewhere else if you don’t have to? Absolutely. So it’s an interesting time right now. It’s still getting – It’s still crazy, and I don’t think it’s going away anytime soon.

[00:02:43] TU: I keep coming back to that, as we talked about in a previous episode. But it’s such a good point. If somebody’s locked in high twos, low threes, when we saw the rates really dip, unless there’s a real urgency to move, new job, whatever might be the situation, like who wants to trade a three percent rate for a high six in the time right now? Yeah. 

It’s crazy. When you just look at monthly payment, which, of course, many folks are thinking about their monthly budget and how the home purchase fits into the rest of their expenses. But, man, what you can get today from a monthly payment versus what you could get 12 months ago is wild. I mean, just wild to see the differences. So I’d be curious to see what happens with rates longer term. 

I’m curious, from your perspective as an investor, considering you’re the cohost of the YFP Real Estate Investing Podcast, like how has the market, environment conditions, interest rates, how has that changed your perspective and outlook as an investor looking for opportunities?

[00:03:43] NH: Yeah. It hasn’t changed the fact that I’m looking, right? I’m always looking to purchase. It’s just changing how we’re running the deal analysis, right? I just had a property come out. I kind of have to relearn the market. We just had one come up this week that kind of hit those numbers, right? Where we know the markets that we look in so well, that when a property pops up and it’s in a certain price range, like I immediately would know, “Oh, this is a deal. We need to go look at it,” right? 

Well, this one that just popped up hit those warning bells. But then when we actually did the deal analysis, it’s no longer a deal. So I have to really reset my numbers, which is tricky, just because the interest rate is hurting cash flow so much. So if we are making those purchases, they have to be a really, really good deal for it to work.

[00:04:24] TU: Yeah. I think you know better than I. You’re much more active in the space than I am. But it feels like a time period like this, where you start to really whittle down maybe the investor pool that’s out there actively looking. It really feels like it incentivizes those investors that have a sound system and process in place and have been doing this for a while. Not only on a deal analysis, but also how can you efficiently manage a group of properties and how can you optimize the portfolio that you have. 

I think for those like you and David that have done the hard work over several years to develop those systems, not to say deals are readily available, but that I think it incentivizes those that have a good foundation and a good system in place.

[00:05:04] NH: Yeah. They’re still out there. It just takes, like you said, some creativity, some diligence, and making sure you adjust.

[00:05:11] TU: I love that, though. I’m always looking, right? I’m always looking. 

[00:05:14] NH: Absolutely. 

[00:05:15] TU: All right. So this week’s episode, we’re going to cover the top 10 mistakes that we see first-time homebuyers making. Nate, to be clear, there is no judgment here, as you and I, I think, have probably made all of these mistakes maybe between the two of us. So we’re hopeful through our experiences. Being both first-time and second-time homebuyers, we’re hopeful that we can share some of this information, what we’ve seen also with other pharmacists, to help prevent others from maybe making some of these same mistakes. We’re going to run through these in somewhat of a rapid fire format. I’m going to present the mistakes 1 through 10, and then we’ll talk about each one in more detail. 

Nate, number one is something we’ve talked about often when it comes to first-time homebuyers, and that is the number one mistake is letting the bank set the budget. Tell us more about what you mean here.

[00:06:02] NH: Yeah. I think what we see from first-time homebuyers, especially, is the thought that, “Well, I’m going to go to the bank. I’m going to get pre-approved. I’m going to ask them what I can afford.” The bank looks at your finances and says, “You can afford up to a $500,000 house. This is your budget,” when in reality, the way we should be approaching it is to determine our budget way in advance, separately together, whatever that looks like, without the bank even involved. Then you can go to that lender and say, “I’m looking to purchase up to $350,000 home. Help me get financing for that,” and really trying to approach it from that budget first perspective, rather than letting the bank determine it for you. 

[00:06:39] TU: Yeah. We’ve talked about this before, home buying, important piece of the financial plan. It’s one part of the financial plan, right? There’s a lot of competing priorities for your monthly budget. I think that you and I have been talking about this now for years, but this is maybe even more true than it has been in years gone by. When we consider the impact of inflation on the monthly budget, the average student loan debt continues to creep up in a direction where a greater percentage of one’s monthly income might be accounted for when it comes to student loans or other debt. 

Oh, and by the way, like pharmacists’ income, even if we see some growth there, like they’re not accounting for what we’re seeing the rise when it comes to not only inflation, but also the rise in the housing market, as we were just talking a few moments ago. So all the more reason that we really need to be setting the budget when it comes to purchasing the home before the bank sets that budget for us to make sure that it fits in with other priorities, and that we’re able to accelerate those other goals in the financial plan, and that we don’t find ourselves locked into a 30-year timeline of something that we look up and say, “Hey, wait a minute. We don’t have a whole lot of cash flow to do other things.” 

Number one mistake, letting the bank set the budget. Number two is rushing into the purchase, right? Easier said than done. Nate, tell us more. 

[00:07:54] NH: Yeah. What I’m seeing right now, especially in the last six months or so, is individuals who have this this FOMO, the fear of missing out. The interest rates are rising. The market is crazy. I have to bid fast. But take a step back. Take some perspective. Realize that, again, if we look at the huge timescale that is mortgage interest rates over time and the market in general, we’re still not at a point where the interest rate is exorbitantly high compared to history. We’re still not at a point where there aren’t going to be homes on the market soon. 

They’re not going away, right? So don’t rush into this decision. It’s a huge purchase. So you want to make sure you’re doing your work upfront. You’re setting that budget, like we just talked about. You’re choosing a location that you actually want to be in, right? You don’t want to make that decision and then want to change it later. You’re looking at what’s important to you. Again, what I’m seeing and what I’m hearing from others in the marketplace is they’re making decisions. Then six months later, they’re regretting it because it’s not exactly what they wanted. They just felt like they had to buy now. So don’t rush in.

[00:08:52] TU: Yeah. I think there’s always a feeling of pressure around that home purchase, right? You and I felt that even in the market. That is not the market that we’re seeing today, right? I just remember that feeling of like, “Okay, I graduated. I did residency. I got married. We’re thinking about starting a family.” It just feels like that box. Like you got to go check it off and buy a home. As we’ll talk about here in a moment, like, “Hey, I don’t really want to pay rent anymore.” 

I think that pressure is always there for first-time homebuyers. But in this current environment, it’s on fire even more. I think there’s this feeling of like, “Oh, man. The Fed’s going to raise the rates like even more. It’s going to go up. Everyone else is kind of rushing into this period of competition. I better jump on this.” Certainly, if the deal, location, and everything lines up, there’s a case, obviously, to move forward. But there’s very few things that we’re locking ourselves into for 30 years, and we want to be careful to make sure that, again, fits in the budget. We talked about that in point number one, but also that it fits in with our plans, and that we’re not 6, 12 months in and saying, “Man, maybe I should have waited a little bit longer,” or, “I regret this purchase at the time.” 

Number three is comparing your rent payment to your mortgage payment. Guilty as charged. I remember when we bought our first home, Nate, back in 2000 – I think it’s been 2009. We were paying $1,100 a month for rent, and it’s even hard to say that out loud in 2022, three-bedroom condo. I think it was like 1,500 or 1,800 square feet. I remember looking at a mortgage payment, our first home we purchased for $176,000. Again, hard to believe in 2022, and I remember seeing, “Wait a minute, $1,100 rent. Principal and interest is going to be about $1,100. Why would I not purchase a home?” 

So talk to us about why comparing rent payment and mortgage payment can potentially be a mistake and not considering all the costs involved?

[00:10:45] NH: Yeah. I think this is something I, again, totally agree. I did the exact same thing when we bought our first home, right? You’re looking at that price, and you’re saying, “Well, it’s a monthly payment that makes me live here, versus a monthly payment makes me live here. I got to compare those.” But with buying a home, there are these other costs, right? You’ve got property taxes, which is huge. You’ve got insurance, which you might not have any insurance, or you might just have renter’s insurance on your current rented property. 

It’s not just that upfront balance. There are a lot of these hidden costs that go into purchasing a home, even something as simple as maintenance and repairs, right? Today, you probably have a landlord or a management company that you call if something breaks. But when you buy that house, you’re in charge, right? You’re calling a plumber. You’re calling an electrician. You’re calling a HVAC specialist. So you have to expect those costs and be ready for them.

[00:11:31] TU: Yeah. Depending on the area that you live in, property taxes, it feels like there’s, obviously, a significant creep that can happen in there. But that can be a big part, the monthly payments. I think about our property taxes here in Columbus. We’re looking at about $500 per month, which I know in some parts of the country might be higher. Some might be a little bit lower. But when you look at that as a percentage, compared to your mortgage payment, like for us, it’s a pretty big chunk that’s going to our property taxes. Then you add on top of that insurance. You mentioned potentially HOA fees, depending on the area that you live in, maintenance and upkeep. 

Especially for first-time homebuyers, like you don’t have a garage full of lawn equipment and other things. You might want to do landscaping. You might want to do some remodeling, furniture you’re going to need for the home. So making sure that we’re factoring all these things in. I’ll link too in the show notes that the New York Times has a really cool calculator that looks at the rent versus buy, and it really tries to put it as apples to apples as you possibly can. So factor in a lot of the costs that Nate’s talking about here and making sure that we’re looking at the big picture, as we look at what the impact of that will be on the monthly budget. That’s number three, potentially making the mistake of comparing your rent payment, your mortgage payment. 

Number four, Nate, is assuming you have to have 20% down. So this really gets into the types of loan options that are out there and how we need to be thinking about saving for that down payment. Tell us more.

[00:12:59] NH: Yeah. I often see this when somebody talks to somebody who bought a house somewhere else, right? Or 10 years ago. I talked to my folks, and they said, “This is how I bought a house,” and they get this advice that, well, you got to have 20% down, and then you can move forward. Some people can feel really stuck with that, especially in these higher cost of living areas, where 20% down could be $200,000, right? So what we’re advocating for is not – Don’t skip 20% down. That’s not a bad place to be but evaluate it. Look to see what your other options are. 

We’ve got pharmacist home loan options that are three and a half percent down. We’ve got FHA lending. That’s the same rate. There’s a lot of different options out there that aren’t just 20%, and there are advantages and disadvantages to each of those. So weigh those options, look at them, talk with somebody who knows what they’re talking about, a mortgage lender, preferably, and figure out what the best option is going to be for you.

[00:13:48] TU: Yeah. Nate, I’m curious. Is your opinion on this changing at all, as interest rates creep, right? So when you and I talked about this a year, a year and a half ago, if we’re just thinking about from an opportunity cost standpoint, obviously, there’s a risk in if we have nothing down or too little down, market changes. You would potentially be upside down on the mortgage. We need to be considering that, our comfort with risk. How else that fits into the rest of the plan. 

But purely from an opportunity cost standpoint, when you’re talking about a loan at 3% or 2.8, 2.9%, you could make a reasonable argument that like, “Hey, if I can put as little down as possible and finance that out over 30 years, I could potentially use those dollars elsewhere in the financial plan in a more strategic way.” As we look at high sixes, is your opinion on that changing at all?

[00:14:38] NH: It’s always been that you want to create a safety net, right? Like David and I talk about on the podcast all the time, we are safety-oriented, boring pharmacists, and that’s not a bad place to be, right? Where you want to go into this with the idea that if the market does correct and I have to sell because that’s when it’s a problem, when you have to sell. Or am I going to be okay? So if you’ve got 10 percent down in a property and there’s an 8% correction, you’re in a good space. 

But if you’re talking about maybe a bigger correction or a lower percentage down, it can be a little more risky, right? There’s no way to know exactly what the future holds, so just it can be beneficial to at least consider that 20% down, just because of the safety net that it provides. 

[00:15:20] TU: Yeah, yeah. Good point about the future, right? We might find ourselves with a huge refinance market in a year or two if rates were to come back down, so good thing to be thinking about. Can’t bank on it but certainly might be an option in the future. The other thing I think of here, Nate, with a 20% down, you’ve talked before on the podcast, you also wrote a blog post about this, we’ll link to it in the show notes, is that student loans is often a common barrier to being able to save up 20% down, right? 

You think about even here in pretty affordable Ohio, if you’re looking at buying a three to four-bedroom home, 2,000, 2,500 square feet, depending where you’re living, probably pushing now 400,000 to 500,000 dollars on that home. So traditional 20% down, we need 80,000 to 100,000 dollars. Trying to accrue that as a first-time homebuyer, while making student loan payments, which we haven’t been doing now for over two years, but those are going to start back up, that can be very overwhelming. So I think that consideration of how do I balance a student loan repayment with the home buying, and that’s an opportunity where maybe you don’t need 20% down. Maybe you decide to do 20% because you feel comfortable with that. But we’ll link to that article in the show notes, as I think that’s probably a topic of interest among many listeners. So that’s number four, assuming you have to 20% down. 

Number five mistake is skipping the pre-approval. Tell us more here.

[00:16:40] NH: Yeah. One of the things that I’ve seen other buyers and I always advise my clients is to get that pre-approval process done early. That’s going to the lender and making sure that you are going to be able to get a loan from them. What you really want to check with them is, one, are there things that I was not aware of, right? Maybe the budget that I said is not realistic, and the bank is going to tell me otherwise or perhaps that the rates are higher than I was expecting, and my calculations are off. That data check is really important from a perspective of which houses can I look at. 

But then more importantly is once you do find the house that you like, everybody’s requiring you to have that pre-approval letter with your offer. So if you find a place, and let’s say there’s competing offers, or you need to move quickly on it, and it’s a Friday afternoon, you don’t have that pre-approval letter in place, you might not be able to purchase that home, just because your offer is no longer a competitive one. Doing that upfront, doing that early is never going to hurt you. You can always renew those pre-approval letters 90 days later or 180 days later. Do it upfront. Make sure that you’ve got that pre-approval letter in place. It’ll just protect you when you’re going to look at those homes.

[00:17:45] TU: Yeah. I think that’s really good advice, Nate, because it’s one of those things I remember when we were looking for homes. My thought was like I’m just casually looking exactly on realtor.com or Redfin or Zillow or whatever. That often quickly turns into like, “I’m seeing a property, and I want to make an offer.” So I think we got to be realistic about where are we at in the process of readiness to buy home. Then as you mentioned, you can renew those, but having that ready if there’s a potential that we’re going to be moving forward with an offer. 

All right, number six is waiving a home inspection. Nate, that gives me anxiety, even hearing that. So tell me more about what you’re seeing here.

[00:18:22] NH: Yeah. So especially the last year or so and even going back a little further, we saw a lot of the craziness in the market leading to people saying, “Well, how else can I be competitive, right? What else can I do? I can’t offer more money. So maybe I’ll waive the inspections, and I’ll just get the house and kind of roll the dice that way.” so I’m always an advocate that you need to have that expert in there to take a look at home, especially if you’re a first-time homebuyer, right? You don’t know what you’re looking for. Your agent can be helpful in this, but they are not an expert in home maintenance. They’re just not. 

We’re experts in the process. We’re experts in the communication. We’re experts in the forms that you need to fill out and how to navigate the actual buying process. But we are not contractors, right? I don’t know how to look at a roof and say, “Oh, yeah. That’s a 15-year roof or a 30-year roof,” right? We just – That’s not part of our process. So making sure that you’ve got an expert on your team that specializes in that area is absolutely essential, and that last line of defense is that home inspection. So make sure you’ve got one in place.

[00:19:20] TU: Yeah. Not all inspectors are created equal, right? Just like not all agents or financial planners or accountants are created equal. So we’ll talk in a little bit about having a team, but this is why I think it’s so important that you’ve talked about this before. If you start with a really good reputable real estate agent, they often are going to be able to point you to a reputable inspector, right? You want to make sure if you’re spending whatever, 400, 500, 600 dollars on an inspection that you’re going to feel good about the quality of that inspection. 

I’ve been through the process of because of the results of an inspection pulling out of a purchase of a property, and like it’s significant. If it’s something that maybe comes up that’s going to cost you 500 bucks, 1,000, 2,000 bucks, like you can roll with that. But it’s the big structural foundational types of things that, man, you just don’t want to be surprised. I think we got to know our role as pharmacists, right? I can’t walk into a home. Maybe you’re [inaudible 00:20:12], but I can’t walk into a home and be like, “Oh, yeah. This is really going to be a problem,” or, “This is not.” 

I’m more enamored in the moment about like what does this look like for our family living in this home, right? I think that tends to even gloss over sometimes what can be some of the bigger pieces that come up. 

[00:20:29] NH: Even with my experience and David’s experience, I mean, when I’m working with a client as their agent, I still don’t want to be the only expert they’re getting advice from, right? I can look at something and say, “Yeah, that’s probably going to be a problem.” But the extent of that problem, I don’t want to be the one to speak to that. You need an expert, right? So it’s super important to clarify that and just make sure that even if you’ve got a really, really good agent on your team, that inspection is still a super important piece.

[00:20:54] TU: So that’s number six, waving a home inspection. Number seven is related but different, and that’s overlooking the big ticket items. Again, I think often when we’re looking at a home, we get excited about maybe some of the fixtures, the furnishings, the remodeled kitchen, those types of things. But are we thinking about the major expenses that might be coming in the future, even if it’s not something in the moment that they’re going to be coming down the road? Are we ready for it from saving standpoint as well? So tell us more here what you’re thinking about.

[00:21:23] NH: Yeah. Just I wanted to put this in people’s heads because it’s something that I often have to coach my buyers through of, hey, the inspection report says this is perfect, and it’s working today. But take a look at the fact that it’s deteriorating, and that it’s going to be replaced in five years, right? Your furnace is working, and everything looks great, and the house is warm. But it’s 22 years old, and we’re about to be done with it, right? So those are things that even with an inspection you might not necessarily catch. 

The other one I saw just recently was a house that was – It was painted wood siding, and it looked flawless. It looked great. It was probably done in the last two years, and just, again, look fantastic. But that’s something that’s going to have to be maintained, right? You have to paint that every five, six, seven years. So a buyer might go into that and think, “This is great. It’s painted siding. I’m done.” But that’s a huge expense that’s going to be coming down the road. So what I advise buyers to do is to look at some of those big ticket items, even if they’re not problems today, and sort of budget for them for the future because they can become problems quite quickly.

[00:22:22] TU: Yeah. Some of them you don’t necessarily think about, even on the second or third home purchase. So I think for first-time homebuyers it makes sense. But things like the roof maybe are some common ones. But driveway, so like we have asphalt driveways. It’s getting beat up right now, and we got a quote for what would that take to eventually repair, put in a cement driveway. Holy cow, right? That’s really expensive. Or what’s the potential lifespan of your AC unit, your hot water tanks? How new or not are those? Other types of upkeep, you gave the example of kind of painting the wood. So there’s a lot of things that could come up.

Just to nerd out here for a moment from the financial plan perspective, this is where having a bucket of funds that you’re planning each month for these expenses that we know are going to come up, we want to be planning for it, right? So we talk a lot with the planning team about creating buckets of savings. If I need a roof, and it’s expected to kind of be at the point of replacement in five years, that’s not an emergency when it gets to that point, right? So what can we be doing to both plan and project those, and then create the buckets of savings, so we can accrue those funds over time and to be ready to pay for those when they come to be?

I think those are great examples, Nate, of things that we’re often overlooking when we do like the rent versus buy comparison. 

[00:23:41] NH: 100%. Yeah. 

[00:23:42] TU: Those big – Especially if you convert them into like a monthly payment of what it would take to save those and then tack that on to what we may be paying in terms of rent. 

[00:23:50] NH: Something that people often rely on here is a home warranty, which is not a bad idea, right? You can use a home warranty at purchase to help combat some of those high cost items, maybe fixing a furnace that breaks down or repairing an AC unit, whatever. But don’t rely on that only, right? A lot of those home warranties – I’ll give you another example from recent past, home warranty for a roof. Great. It seems like, okay, if the roof is going to break, when it does, I’ve got this home warranty in place. 

Well, what happens a lot of times is that home warranty company looks at when you purchase that warranty. Let’s say you purchase it at year 15 on a 20-year roof. We’re only going to cover that quarter of that roof that you’ve actually kind of paid for at the time that you bought it. So keep in mind, home warranty can be helpful in terms of defraying some of those costs, but it is not a solve all the problems kind of a thing.

[00:24:39] TU: Yep. Great point. So that’s number seven, overlooking the big ticket items. Number eight common mistake among first-time homebuyers is making a large purchase before closing. So I assume we’re referencing some impacts here on credit and lending. Tell us more.

[00:24:54] NH: Yeah. When you were going through the pre-approval process, the bank is looking at all of your debt and all of your income and all of your assets. If you are adding things to the debt side of that equation before closing, when they go to recheck things, you can actually price yourself out of things. You could mess up your interest rate. You could mess up actually getting the property. I’ve seen people where they go and they buy furniture before closing. This has never happened to me but to others I’ve heard about, where they go to those great 36 months, same as cash. I’m going to buy all the new furniture I need for this new house before closing. 

When you buy something like that on credit at a furniture store, for example, it’s looked at like a maxed out debt. So if I buy $5,000 of the furniture, 36 months, same as cash, they are taking out a $5,000 line of credit, and I have maxed out that line of credit. 

[00:25:40] TU: Oh, utilization of it. Yeah. 

[00:25:42] NH: Exactly. So when the bank goes to rerun your report on this great home that you’re about to purchase, they all of a sudden see that, whoa, you got this credit hit. Now, your credit score has dropped. Your new interest rate is now a point higher because you’ve messed this up. So don’t make any major purchases. Don’t take out credit cards. All that stuff should be just put on hold until after closing.

[00:26:02] TU: Yeah. A point higher over 30 years is going to be a lot more than $5,000. That’s a really good one. So really making sure that as you get to that point of closing, as you’re working through the process with the bank, making sure any purchases, any opening up credit card you need to put on hold or making sure you got some space in separation in that as well.

[00:26:25] NH: Or at the very least, talk to your lender first. Hey, lender, I know we’re going through this, but I’m thinking about doing this. Is that going to be okay? Is that a bad idea? Ask them. Keep them engaged. Do not surprise your lender. That’s the worst thing you can do.

[00:26:38] TU: Okay, number nine is forgetting to lock in your interest rate. I know another common question that comes up here is when people are comparing rates, especially if they’re searching these on a website, is the option of purchasing points as well. So tell us about rate locks and then how one should be thinking about the purchasing of points and what that means.

[00:26:59] NH: Yeah. So the rate lock point was actually something that I just added kind of for this time, right? Because previously, locking your interest rate wasn’t nearly as important. Interest rates weren’t going anywhere. So if it was 3.5 this week or 3.3 next week, I mean, whatever, right? It’s not that big of a deal. Locking it was great, but it was not as important. 

Now, with the way that rates have been increasing recently, what we’re seeing a lot of lenders offer is a locked rate, where you can lock it for 45 days or even sometimes longer with a float down option so that if the rate does drop, you’re allowed to drop along with it. But if you don’t lock in that rate, your rate can increase with the market. 

So I actually saw – I had a buyer recently that closed on a property, and we almost missed the date for his rate lock. Luckily, the lender was able to extend it and make sure that we met with closing. But if you don’t lock that rate at the right time or don’t close on time, you can miss that window and easily see half a point or a point increase as that month and a half goes by that it takes to close on a property. So it can be a big deal.

[00:28:01] TU: Tell us about the option of purchasing points. I know this comes up a lot, where kind of the window rate that someone will get may include or be assuming that you’re going to be buying points, essentially buying down that interest rate. So what are you seeing out there right now in terms of the viability of that and how people can think about the breakeven point where that makes sense?

[00:28:23] NH: Yeah. Another question that’s changed dramatically in the last two years since I last talked. But the idea with a point is that you can essentially pay money up front to have a lower interest rate over time, right? You can decrease your interest rate by paying for it in the form of what’s called points. You can even, in some cases, have the seller pay the points at closing. That’s pretty uncommon still in this market, but it’s out there. 

Typically, again, in the past, I was not recommending buying down points because the rates were already so low that why spend cash up front, just to get from 3 to 2.9, right? Who cares. But now, if you can get significant movement on that interest rate and you’re looking at a very, very large loan, it might be worthwhile to consider, especially if you’ve got a little extra capital upfront today and want to lock in that lower interest rate over a longer period of time. 

It’s something to consider. It’s always worth looking at. The best way to do it and compare things apples to apples is to ask every lender that you’re shopping with for a rate that is without points. Give me the flat rate without points. Let me see that first, and then let’s talk about adding points onto it. Because that’s the only way you’re going to be able to compare it apples to apples.

[00:29:26] TU: Yeah. That might not even be so obvious when you’re initially shopping. I was talking with a pharmacist recently that was talking about a rate they had received from a lender, and they didn’t realize that there was built into that an assumption they were going to pay X dollars to buy down the rate. But they were comparing that to another rate that didn’t have points involved. So to your point, we really need to compare those as equal as possible to be able to make a decision on where to go forward. That’s great.

Number 10, Nate, is skipping out on the proper team. I talked about this a little bit with making sure you’ve got a good agent that can be a connection and referral to other parts on the team. But there are a ton of folks involved in this process, right? When you think about the agent, you think about the lender, you think about the title company, the lawyers that are working as a part of the title process. Tell us a little bit about what is the proper team and some strategies folks can employ to make sure they’ve got the right team in place. 

[00:30:16] NH: Yeah. This part can feel overwhelming. Whenever somebody started talking about team, I started to feel like, “Oh, I don’t know how to make a team. I’m a first-time homebuyer. I don’t know what I’m talking about. I don’t know who to call. That’s too overwhelming. I’m not going to deal with it,” right? But I encourage you to look at that and not think of it as something scary, but it’s something that’s there to help you, right? Just like we have a team in the hospital or a team in the pharmacy, we’re not expected to know and do everything exactly, right? It’s a team effort. 

Starting with someone like a real estate agent can be a great place to go. You can find one expert. Then from that expert, they can refer you to others that are in that space, so your accountant, your insurance agent, your lawyer, your home inspector, your contractors. All those can stem from that real estate agent if you’d like. But you want to make sure those experts are in place because, again, relying on you to do all the background research and googling things ahead of time and YouTube videos online, right? Like you want to make sure that you’ve got experts in place that can help you with those difficult things so that you’re not trying to manage all of it, while also having a career and a family and everything else that’s going on.

[00:31:18] TU: I really like how you’ve simplified this because the concept of all those individual members is overwhelming. But if I can feel good about finding a good agent who is qualified, reputable, I feel good about the working relationship with that individual, good communication skills. From there, I can really rely on them and trust them to help me with those other connections and other parts of the team. 

Just like we talk about with financial planning, the bar of entry into financial planning is fairly low in terms of someone being able to call themselves a financial advisor. Therefore, there’s a huge span that’s out there in terms of experience, credential, certifications, individuals that they’ve worked with and areas of expertise. I would argue there’s a lot of similarities in terms of real estate agent, in terms of how many deals they’ve done, experience they have in working with pharmacists or working with certain lending options and their awareness of lending options that are out there. So I think really doing due diligence and homework to make sure you have that good agent is really important. 

That’s one of the main reasons, Nate, that we’ve now collaborated probably going on, what, three-plus years working with you to develop the home buying concierge service, which is really intended to help individuals in the YFP community, looking to purchase a home, whether it’s their first home or a second home, whether it’s a real estate investment property to make sure they find an agent that they are comfortable with, that’s a good fit, but also that has you there as a resource along the way. So tell us a little bit more about that home buying concierge service, and then we’ll make sure to point folks in the right direction to learn more information.

[00:32:53] NH: Yeah. What we wanted to develop was a way to take the guesswork out of that first step. Like I said, when I was buying my home, first-time home purchase, I was overwhelmed by this idea of the team and like where do I start. I think I just like asked a couple of friends for a real estate agent. That can work, right? It’s good to get a referral from someone personal. But what we’re finding is that a lot of times, people are moving somewhere, or they’re in an area where maybe they don’t know a good agent, or maybe that friend didn’t have the best experience. 

So if you’re looking to take that guesswork out of the process, what we’ve developed is a really simple phone call. You can connect with me 20 or 30 minutes on the phone. We’ll get an idea of your budget, where you’re looking to buy, what your must haves are, what type of agent we think you’d work best with. We have some really cool targeted questions about what that process looks like and what’s important to you when picking an agent. Then we help you get connected with them, all for free. So we’ll actually interview agents in your local area, if we don’t have anybody already in our Rolodex of people, and we’ll get you connected with them so that you can get off and running on the right foot. Like we said, If you don’t know anything else about the area or any other people to work with, start with that agent, and everything can kind of grow from there. 

The last piece that I think is important is that once we make that connection to the agent, we don’t go away like, “I don’t drop off the team. I’m still part of that process.” So if you need a second opinion on something, if you want to bounce ideas off of somebody who’s both a pharmacist and an agent, come right back. I’m still part of the team that can help you guys out. So it’s been a fun service because I get to see pharmacists buy places all over the country and see them grow. It’s a great way for us to kind of give back and help out with a pretty stressful process and making it less stressful.

[00:34:30] TU: Yeah. Again, whether you’re a first-time homebuyer or you’re moving or you’re looking for an investment property, all of those involve finding a good agent, and that service that Nate just described is intended to do exactly that, regardless of if it’s a primary home or an investment property. We’ve had some really cool success stories through this program, and I would point folks to episode 160 as an example of that, where you talked with Shelby Bennett and Bryce Platt about their experiences, working with you through that concierge service and what that is experience was like and why it was valuable. We’ll link to that in the show notes. 

For folks to get connected with you, very easy, you can go to yourfinancialpharmacist.com. At the top, you can click on home buying and then find an agent. From there, you’ll find an option to reach out and connect with Nate. Then you’ll be off and running with finding a good agent that’s local to your area. 

Nate, as always, thanks so much. It’s been an awesome 2022 and looking forward to having you on throughout 2023 to provide our community with ongoing updates and information related to home buying.

[00:35:29] NH: Thanks, Tim. I really appreciate it.

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:35:30] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 281: The Connection Between Finances and Fitness with The Fit Pharmacist


Dr. Adam Martin, The Fit Pharmacist, talks about practical strategies you can implement to help you thrive, five areas of the SMILE framework for living to your full potential, and the most effective antidote and prevention to disempowering feelings.

About Today’s Guest

Dr. Adam Martin works with people to write their scripts for success using proper nutrition, stress management, and the power of a positive attitude. He earned his doctorate of pharmacy degree from the University of Pittsburgh School of Pharmacy, and with over 7 years of experience working full-time in the community pharmacy setting, he’s passionate about empowering other pharmacists and pharmacy students to put the health back into healthcare through leading by example in their professional practice to not only live their best lives but to

inspire others along the way to do the same. He pairs his PharmD with his expertise as a certified personal trainer and nutrition consultant to guide self-care back into healthcare.

Dr. Martin is the founder of The Fit Pharmacist, LLC. As a National Speakers Association (NSA) Professional Speaker, Adam’s core passion is traveling to pharmacy schools across the world to speak to pharmacy students, sharing practical plans of action that will empower them to maximize their careers and create a competitive edge in the profession to maximize their success and degree of impact. 

He has made his life’s work showing people how to take control of their overall wellness, sharing SimpleSolutions through his writing for numerous pharmacy publications including PharmacyTimes magazine, and is the author of the best-selling book “Rx: You: The Pharmacist’s Survival Guide for Managing Stress & Fitting in Fitness” as well as “Gen-Z Pharmacist: Dominate Pharmacy School & Script Your Dream Career.” He is the host of The Fit Pharmacist Healthcare Podcast, sharing successes and practical strategies from the most successful minds in the profession of pharmacy with a new episode released every week. 

With a passion for learning and serving his patients, he’s an inaugural member of the Pennsylvania Pharmacists Association’s Leadership Excellence and Advocacy Development (LEAD) program, and strives to serval the global community of pharmacy as a medical missionary, having served in Honduras and Panama as a pharmacist in the field. In 2019, he was named the “Most Influential Pharmacist” by SingleCare’s Best of the Best Pharmacy Awards.

Episode Summary

In this week’s episode, YFP Co-Founder & CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD, is joined by Dr. Adam Martin, The Fit Pharmacist. Dr. Adam Martin is known for working with people to write their scripts for success using proper nutrition, stress management, and the power of a positive attitude. In today’s show, Tim and Adam discuss the eBook, “5 to Thrive Healthcare Habits,” and how those mindset habits for thriving in life mirror the mindset for financial fitness. Adam shares how he came up with the SMILE framework, how to operate from a thriving versus surviving mindset, and how to form a realistic work-life balance with practical strategies that anyone can implement into their lives. Tim and Adam work through the five areas of the SMILE framework, created to help others live with intention and unlock their full potential by providing examples and demonstrating the concepts with real-life examples. 

The SMILE framework consists of the following: 

  • Shift Your Focus
  • Move and Groove
  • Identify the Best You
  • Let Loose and Celebrate
  • Electrify Your Spirit

Together they discuss what Adam calls the most effective, instant antidote and prevention to disempowering feelings. Adam shares a technique, “GRIN (Gratitude Ripple In the Now),” for celebrating and igniting joy.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRO]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

This week, I had a chance to welcome a friend and colleague, Dr. Adam Martin, The Fit Pharmacist, to talk about Five to Thrive Health Care Habits. Highlights from the show include Adam and I talking through practical strategies you can implement to help you not just get by or survive but to thrive, the five areas of the SMILE framework to live with intention at your full potential, and the most effective instant antidote, as well as prevention, to disempowering feelings.

Now, before we jump into the show, I recognize that many listeners may not be aware of what the team at YFP Planning does in working one-on-one with more than 280 households across the country. YFP Planning offers fee-only high-touch financial planning that is customized to the pharmacy professional. If you’re interested in learning more about how working one-on-one with a certified financial planner may help you achieve your financial goals, you can book a free discovery call by visiting yfpplanning.com. Whether or not YFP Planning services are a good fit for you, know that we appreciate your support of this podcast and our mission to help pharmacists achieve financial freedom. 

Okay, let’s jump into my interview with The Fit Pharmacist, Dr. Adam Martin. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:21] TU: Dr. Adam Martin, The Fit Pharmacist, welcome.

[00:01:24] AM: What’s up, Tim. How you doing today?

[00:01:26] TU: Man, I’m doing great. How’s your week been, and how are you doing?

[00:01:30] AM: Dude, it’s Fit Pharmacist Friday. Let’s go. Let’s go.

[00:01:35] TU: Let’s do it. So you recently published a resource, and we’ll leave a link to this as well, Five to Thrive Healthcare Habits, simple and quick ways to use what you have to live a lifestyle you dream about. It caught my attention because of how much overlap there was between those five habits and what I often think about as it relates to the financial plan. So I’m going to dig into each one of those in more detail. 

This has been a long time in the making. You and I had the opportunity to present together at the OPA Annual Meeting last year in Columbus. That was on fire, right? That was an awesome session that we did together, and I’ve thought so many times, when you and I have a chance to converse and dig deep, like there is so much synergy between a lot of the work that you’re doing and the focus on the mindset in the healthcare and how we often need to, should be thinking about the financial plan as well. 

So this is going to be a party of sorts. It always is when Dr. Adam Martin is on the line. So before we get into those five habits, we’ll walk through them one by one, I don’t want to just gloss over the significance of operating from a mindset of thriving, rather than just getting by and surviving. Since the focus of our time together is going to be all about thriving, tell us more about why that is center to what you’re doing and what you’re talking about and how you’ve developed that mindset and learn that through your own experiences.

[00:03:05] AM: Absolutely, Tim. Well, first off, thanks so much for the opportunity. Like you said, it’s always fire getting together, especially in person, but we’ll roll with this. But, yeah, OPA was awesome. First live event since COVID, I believe, for both of us in a long time. So that’s kind of where that idea stemmed from because there are so many overlaps with wellness and fitness and also your money because you won’t feel very well if you’re broke or in debt, so it just kind of goes with that through line. 

But the reason that I made this, and just so y’all know, this is a free e-book, so I’m not selling anything, this is such a needed resource. I created it, like put a ton of time, made it simply applicable because there’s so much information out there that, yeah, it’s great. But how are you going to apply it? 

[00:03:54] TU: That’s right. 

[00:03:54] AM: For example, we all want to get healthier, right? So we go and hire a nutritionist, dietician, whatever. That’s outside of our normal, and they say be mindful when you eat. Chew your salad 30 times before you eat. We don’t get lunch breaks. What are you talking about? 

So when you take the science, the research, and you say, “How can I practically apply this in a simple way,” because here’s the reality, you ain’t got more time. You don’t got any time. You ain’t got more things, and you’ve got no room left on your to-do list. So how are you going to make a change that you know you need to make and you want to make when you don’t have time, when you don’t have money, and you don’t know what’s going to actually work and what’s a scam? 

I took all the things that I’ve learned in my journey in coaching my clients and working with some of the best in the world of mindset of fitness, of nutrition, and I condensed them down into a practical framework that is easy to understand, and more importantly, easy to implement, that actually gets results. So that’s kind of where that came from, from the need of burnout and stress and how do I manage a work-life balance. There’s such a need for it. That’s where it came from. 

[00:05:12] TU: That’s why they call you The Tony Robbins of Healthcare right there, right? That is why. I think that the practical implementation is huge, and we see this every day from the financial side. I live it in my own personal financial journey. We can have these big lofty goals with big numbers. Until we break that down to something that means something to us today, that we can put our arms around, that we can grasp, that we can implement, that we can get some momentum and wins on, those are just nebulous, big, scary goals that we can have somebody coach us and say, “You know what, Adam? You need $3.5 million in your retirement account to save.” 

What does that mean for today and how we can practically implement this? Again, I just love the synergy between the work that you’re doing and what we’re obviously talking about over at YFP. So let’s jump into these five habits to thrive, and the acronym here to remember is the SMILE framework, okay?

[00:06:10] AM: That’s right. 

[00:06:10] TU: S is shift your focus. M is move and groove. We’ll talk about these each individually. I is identify the best you. L is let loose and celebrate, and E is electrify your spirit. So number one, shift your focus. In this habit, you talk about how we often set a goal. It could be around losing weight. It could be around healthier eating, connecting to our community, in our case, improving our financial situation. Despite knowing what to do, we don’t do it. The choices that we make that do or don’t lead us to our goals often revolve around our state of mind. 

So my question for you here, Adam, is why are we drawn into these negative thought patterns and habits that can put us in ruts and prevent us from achieving our goals, even when we don’t want that to be the case?

[00:07:02] AM: Excellent questions. Why don’t we do that? We’re like – It’s like in the moment. We know we’re not supposed to do this, but we’re doing it anyway. So big picture, I just want to simplify this. The reason it’s called the SMILE framework is that regardless of your nutrition, your job, your career, your personal brand, all of it, the reason you do anything is so that you become happy. You want a happy life. What’s the most characteristic thing that would kind of show that someone’s happy? A smile. While this might seem mute, it is absolutely true. We all want to be happy. That’s why we do anything. By being happy you SMILE. 

The reason I did this is to make it simple, so that you can see that you are focused on the outcome. You’re focused on what you want. A lot of times, when we get overwhelmed or we’re pulled in all these directions, for example, what do I do with my finances? The world’s going into recession? What do I do with this? What I do with that? What’s the best workout plan? What’s the best nutrition plan? How do I manage stress? The question you have to ask is what is your outcome? What do you want? 

That comes right into your question, ironically, because that’s the answer. The first kind of pin of that SMILE framework is S, to shift your focus. What you need to ask yourself is what do I want? What is the outcome that you want? If you reverse engineer that, it will lead you upstream to realize that it all starts with the quality of question that you ask. To your point or question, again, the answer of why do we ask questions that get us so worked up, that get us so stressed out and focused on what’s wrong? It’s because that’s our survival brain. 

Here’s something that I want you to hear and understand. Your brain does not exist to make you financially successful, to make you happy, or to make you thrive or live your best life. Your brain exists to keep you alive. That’s it. So when you’re taking a financial risk for a potential gain, that is interpreted as dangerous. 

[00:09:11] TU: Scary. Yup.

[00:09:12] AM: Threats to your survival. 

[00:09:14] TU: That’s right. 

[00:09:15] AM: Your subconscious is going to hijack you and say, “Oh, no. That could mean death. Let’s not do that.” Going to work out, that is painful, right? I mean –

[00:09:25] TU: Literally tearing muscles. Yes. 

[00:09:26] AM: After not going for a while, that is painful. That is a threat to survival. So whatever area of your life you want to improve, you inherently know that when you start that process, that it is uncomfortable. We’ve all heard that phrase, nothing grows from comfort zones. So you have to recognize that you will have resistance from the good intention that your brain is trying to protect you. So don’t be hard on yourself and say, “Why is my brain so stupid?” It’s trying to keep you alive because that’s what it’s designed to do. So you have to identify the purpose. You have to identify what you want, and then recognize there’s a gap there that is going to require your active participation.

[00:10:09] TU: Yeah. Adam, my mind is spinning with the financial connection here. So a great example, I just mentioned a big scary retirement number before, $3.5 million. That often is not the question we want to focus on. So we’ve been trained societally through a lot of financial information commercials to ask the question of how much do you need in your bank account to retire, right? It’s an important question, but it’s not the question that we need to be asking ourselves, right? 

The question we need to be asking ourselves is what does it mean to live a wealthy life, not just in dollars and cents, right? How can our financial plan support and get us towards living a wealthy life? Why do we even care about this topic of money to begin with? Money is a tool that derives value, only because you and I and the rest of the world say it has value. Objectively, by itself, it doesn’t have value, right? So why does money matter to you? What does it mean to live a wealthy life? How can we support a financial plan that aligns with that? 

Because to your point about some of the pain, it’s no different with our finances. If I say that, I want to be able to save money for the future because of X, Y, and Z, and that’s a compelling reason, well, guess what? That means I’m going to have to not spend it today to save it for the future. There’s pain in that, right? There’s pain. So I love how you focus. Again, we’ll link to this, so folks can download it and read it in its entirety. 

But you have a whole page, maybe two pages. I remember at least one page of questions that we can be asking ourselves, right? Better questions, give us better information that we can live with more intentionality. I think that’s so important here, when we talk about shifting your focus. So that’s habit number one, shifting your focus. 

Number two is we work to the SMILE framework. The M is move and groove, and you argue that this is the most effective instant antidote, as well as prevention to disempowering feelings. That’s a pretty strong statement. Tell us more. Why is that the case, and what does this practically look like?

[00:12:14] AM: Absolutely. So without a doubt, if you’re in a funk mood, if you’re scared, if you’re terrified, the fastest way to break out of that state is to move your body, the fastest way. You can do it immediately. For example, if you ever had like an argument, a confrontation, or you’ve heard the phrase, “Go walk it off,” there’s truth behind that. So this comes to go like, well, if we just move. What are you just saying? Like run away from your problems? Running away from your problems burns zero calories, okay? 

But what you have to recognize is that when you move your body, you are changing your state. So I’m not saying go run a marathon. But I’m saying, for example, if you’re out in public, and I told you that I would give you 50 grand if you could tell me which of the people in public was depressed, I guarantee you could do it. You’re not a psychiatrist. You’re not a therapist. You don’t have ESP. But how can you see that? Because when they’re walking, their heads’ down. They’re walking slow. They’re chests in, right? They’re kind of like this. From someone that has overcome that, I can tell you, that’s absolutely spot on. 

But if you – If I do the same to the other side, I say, “What if I gave you 50 grand to identify the most confident person that you encounter?” You can already see in your mind what that’s like. They’re walking with purpose and intention. Their shoulders are back. Their chest is out. Maybe they’ve got like a little swag in their step. It’s because that motion is inducing the emotion. If you look at emotion, I don’t want to feel bad. I don’t want to feel better. I want to be happy. I want to feel fulfilled. Emotion is energy in motion. So to snap that, it’s very simple. Change how you’re carrying yourself, moving yourself.

Now, to the practical implementation part. Well, Adam, how do I just snap out of it if I’m having such a bad day, week, month? Music. Let me ask y’all a question. Have you ever worked in a community pharmacy or just been out in public and on the PA system, on the radio in the store, a song comes on? Maybe some Gloria Estefan, if we want to throw it back. All of the sudden, you see Granny Smith in Aisle 5, tapping her foot to the point where she’s like, “[inaudible 00:14:38] pop out or what?” She can’t help it. She might not even be aware of it. 

Everybody is moving, tapping their feet, bobbing their head. Music is the fastest way to change your emotion. You can do it without even being aware of it. So that’s the fastest way to snap out of your state. Play a song that makes you jive.

[00:14:59] TU: So are we talking dance party in the pharmacy? Is that what we’re doing here?

[00:15:02] AM: So true story. When I started as a pharmacist back in 2012, it was, I mean, busy store, like super busy. When I retired there in December, we were doing over 600 scripts a day on Monday with no pharmacist overlap. That’s the reality. So there’s a lot of stress as you can imagine. So in order to kind of refocus, I would actually create something free on Pandora called Happy Radio. So whenever I noticed stress coming, the levels of tension going up, I would literally play that. 

That’s where – If you ever heard the term club pharmacy, I coined that term back in 2012 because it’s how you frame your environment. If you say, for example, I have to go to work today, how does that make you feel? Versus I get to go to club pharmacy today. That’s going to interrupt your state. What is he talking about? What, like Sam’s Club? Like what? Yeah. So you frame it, and then you entertain it, and you do something different. That’s how you kind of snap out of the norm so that you can rescript what you want to get.

[00:16:06] TU: I love that. I think some people, this is more natural than others. For me, it’s music. You talk about the idea of creating your playlist. Have it ready, right? Walking is a huge daily rhythm or routine. It just provides like, for me, some perspective, some space, and some peace of mind as well. So find that piece that really helps you. That’s number two, move and groove. 

Number three, the I in the SMILE framework is identify the best you. What do you mean by this, identify the best you, and how can individuals work towards accomplishing this?

[00:16:42] AM: Excellent question. When it comes to psychology, the most defended aspect of the human condition is your identity. People will defend that to the death. Look at any religious war that’s ever been fought. Look at anyone that’s done anything drastic. Look at people who refuse to do anything. What do they say? I’m not that kind of person. That’s not who I am. Your identity is the strongest driving force in your psychology. 

When we’re talking about goals with finances, with fitness, why are you doing that? Why do you want to save three and a half million? Yes, that is, obviously, a good goal. But what is the means behind that? What does money mean to you? What will that afford you? There’s got to be some sort of compelling future because the reality that we all know is that whatever your goal is, whether it’s small or large, think big, by the way. Whatever your goal is, you are going to have resistance. You’re going to come across adversity. You’re going to be exhausted. You’re going to start with a lot of motivation. 

But if you’re not committed to exactly with a perfect picture in your mind to visualize exactly why you’re putting in the time, why you’re putting in the work, why you’re sacrificing a comfortable lifestyle, and instead going after it, facing rejection to make calls, to grow whatever you’re trying to achieve. You have to have a clear, compelling future that pulls you towards what you want. Keyword, you, what you want. Not what your friends want. Not what you think you should want or should have or should do. Quit shoulding all over yourself, please. You want something that is genuinely authentic to what makes you happy. That’s the secret. 

[00:18:43] TU: That last point is huge in the financial services space, right? Because I talked to people weekly. I experienced this myself as well, where often our goals aren’t truly our goals. The reflection of what we feel like should be our goals. Or we interpret it as someone else says it should be our goals. 

One thing you said there I want to dissect a little bit more, you kind of mentioned like, by the way, think big. As you said that, my mind went down this path how often the goals I hear from individuals, guilty as charged, no judgment to anyone else, we often limit those. I’m wondering why? So for example, right? If someone says, “Hey, I really have a goal to give philanthropically or to give,” like usually we’ll put a qualifier on that like 3, 5, 10 percent of my income, or I really want to save for retirement. 

It’s a big number. Don’t get me wrong. But we’re kind of defaulting to like what is a limit low number that is acceptable or that we’ve heard elsewhere, and our mind doesn’t naturally go towards, well, if instead of making $120,000 a year, and I gave 10% of that or $12,000, what if I made $500,000 a year? 30% of that or – Why doesn’t our mind go in that direction? Why are we kind of defaulting to this low norm, if that makes sense?

[00:20:11] AM: Excellent question. So another thing that we all know of, and I want to kind of bring this back home, is the only thing that’s going to stop you is you. Not the economy, not your circumstances, you. When I mean you, what I mean is your fear. While there’s lots of specific fears with everyone in specific situations, all humans have two fears. There’s two fears that are the most common fears, the fear of not being enough and the fear of being unlovable. 

When you’re looking at, “I want to set a goal,” if you say like, “Oh, this would be a nice increase.” Let’s say, for example, you’re making 120 grand a year, and you want to go up to 150. Just a little bit. Well, if I set 500 grand a month, that is a huge jump. That is a risk that if I don’t get it, it might mean that I’m not enough. It might mean that I can’t be loved because I didn’t get this. It’s not what’s going on. It’s not your circumstance. It’s the meaning that you give to your circumstance that is the driving force of whether you’re going to face everything and rise or fall into that fear. It’s all based on the meaning that you give something that becomes the outcome.

[00:21:29] TU: In that example, we’re essentially trying to set ourselves up to avoid failure or not even actual failure. Our perception of what that failure would be in that. So that’s interesting. Okay. That’s number three, identify the best you. Habit number four in the SMILE framework is let loose and celebrate. You say, “You need to party more, like seriously.” You will feel like you’re losing when you’re actually winning, if you do not celebrate your wins. My question here is why do we not celebrate our wins, in the same way that we dwell on our losses?

[00:22:03] AM: Let me paint a scenario that those of you watching or listening might resonate with. You work for years, for months, for, let’s say, getting a job as a pharmacist, and you get the job. You get the email. You’re on stage, getting a promotion. As they’re calling your name and reading your bio, you say, “What’s next?” You get the promotion. Then you say, “I’m going to go after this goal.” Let’s say that you launch a book. Let’s say you’re trying to get your name out there and build your personal brand. So you decide that you’re going to publish a book. So it gets released. What’s next? What’s next? What’s next? You’re so focused in the future that you’re living in a state of anxiety. 

Now, here’s something that I want to just share, as far as emotion, like why do I feel this way? What’s wrong with me? Those kinds of things that get us twisted. If you’re living in the past, you’re living in depression. If you’re focused on the future, you’re living in anxiety. But when you’re focused on the present, it is a gift, which is why it’s called the present. The attitude of gratitude is honestly the antidote for fear. 

Try this. If you’re angry, frustrated, or ticked off, I want you to think about and just look around and say one thing that you’re grateful for. Then say another and then another. It is literally impossible to be both grateful and angry or upset or overwhelmed at the same time. It is impossible. So the antidote to this, really, is to be grateful at your progress. 

Now, there is a thin line for this, and I think the best way to do it is to live it and really go after your goals because on one hand, you don’t want to rest on your laurels and take your foot off the gas, because if you’re not growing, you’re dying. So you want to constantly be pursuing the best version of you. But if you’re living in that what’s next, what’s next, what’s next, here’s the reality. You will feel like you’re losing when you’re actually winning, if you don’t take time to note how far you’ve come. 

[00:24:16] TU: 100%. Yes. 

[00:24:19] AM: That’s really it. So you say like, “Oh, Adam. There’s so much going on. I don’t know. How do I be grateful? I’ve heard this before. It’s not practical,” blah, blah, blah. So we’re going to go with the grin, with the SMILE framework, and stay on theme here. I actually found this out of a necessity when I was in a really dark time in my life many years ago because I heard this over and over and over from so many successful people. Gratitude is the antidote to everything, all this sort of stuff. 

I woke up in an anxiety attack, and I thought, how can I start this gratitude thing? So I was laying in bed, and I said, “What can I be grateful for right here right now?” So I just rolled my feet around like, “Wow, these sheets are really comfortable. I’m really grateful to have comfortable sheets.” “Wow, I’m on a comfortable mattress. I’m really grateful to have this mattress and not be laying on the floor.” “Wow, I have my own bedroom. I’m grateful to be in this bedroom.” Oh, my goodness. I own a house. Wow, I own a house, and it’s in a neighborhood that’s quiet. Just be quiet and listen. I can’t hear anything. It’s so quiet. I live in the city.” 

It became a ripple effect from wherever you are in the moment. State and feel and focus on wherever you are in the moment so that it’s real. It’s one thing to say that you’re grateful for something that might have happened. But when you can be lying in bed and feel your soft sheets, it gives evidence and makes that real. When you’re in your room, and you like peace and quiet, and you just listen to the silence, that is evidence that, yes, this is something I can be grateful. 

So the acronym I made for this is to GRIN. It’s the gratitude ripple in the now. So wherever you are, just pause and start thinking like do you have clothes on? Those probably. I mean, not everyone in the world has clothes, right? Are you standing somewhere that is safe? Is it raining outside, but you’ve got to shelter over your head? Just start where you are, and ripple from where you are outwards, and just watch what happens inside. That is truly the secret. But it’s so simple, people throw it out like, “Oh.” It’s so simple, it can’t fix my complex problem. The antidote really is that simple, and it’s so simple that it actually works.

[00:26:40] TU: Yeah. I really liked that. You and I have talked about this before. This has been transformative in my own life. So I am notorious for living in the future. Living in the present is not my jam. I will say I’m not a big dweller of the past. So that is something I’m grateful for. But what I have found is like what you describe. Publishing a book, what’s next? Giving a speaking event, what’s next? Achieving this milestone, what’s next? It’s not natural for me to really pause and be present in the moment. 

But the gratitude piece, what I have found is, and you described it perfectly, an example, when you’re laying there in bed in the midst of an anxiety attack, as you’re going through a gratitude, exercise, and reflection, it forces you to be present in the moment. It shifts your perspective and focus while you’re there as well. 

I think the trick for this, in my opinion, which you’ve really addressed here with the gratitude rip on the now, the GRIN acronym, is it doesn’t have to be like a one time in the morning, I’m going to do a gratitude exercise for five minutes. This could be a quick reminder as you’re going throughout the day because as you highlight, I mean, at any given moment of the day, we can all stop and find one thing that we’re thankful for in that moment. So I love that. 

[00:27:57] AM: One caveat to that, I don’t want to say that thinking in the future is a bad thing. You want to always be planning. This is one of the biggest sources of anxiety that pharmacists have. When you’re in pharmacy school, your goal is to graduate and get a job. So when you graduate and get a job, if you don’t have goals, you have a problem. That’s where a lot of pharmacy students transitioning to pharmacists life are. 

I don’t want to downplay how valuable forward thinking is. Just make sure that as you make those milestones, you pause, you note them, and you celebrate them however you actually can feel that celebration of your progress in the process.

[00:28:37] TU: I love that. Great input. Number five in the SMILE framework is electrify your spirit. It’s clear as we’re talking that consistency is the key here when we talk about the SMILE framework and the importance of a daily routine. You say in the e-book, “Stand guard at the doorway of your mind at the most critical time of the day, the beginning.” Tell us more about why standing guard at the beginning of the day is that important, and what are some of the habits that folks can implement to help here?

[00:29:07] AM: If you ever woke up, and you stub your toe, and then you realize that you’re late, and you get a red light, and then your tech doesn’t show up, or someone comes and yells at you, and what do you say? Wow, this day keeps going from bad to worse. It is a ripple effect from what you focus on, literally taking all that we’ve looked at through the SMILE framework, starting with shifting your focus. 

When you wake up in the morning, you have a clean slate. You are starting with a brand new bank account of time for those 24 hours. If the first thing you look at or think about is your to-do list or the news or all the things that you wish you did, then that’s going to ripple and transcend the whole mood of your day. So it literally – You all know this is true, but we all do it. 

Again, simple doesn’t mean easy, especially if this is a habit that you’ve had for a long time, the simplest thing, to stand guard at the door of your mind is to not touch your phone for the first half hour, hour, whatever that might be. For me, it’s two hours because it’s that sacred of time. Because think about it. People want to get your attention, news highlights. They’re not talking about new puppies that were given out for free. They’re talking about stabbings and murder and death. 

[00:30:35] TU: Push notification. Push notification. 

[00:30:37] AM: Yeah, yeah. All that stuff. It’s grabbing your attention. Your eyeballs are the new real estate. That’s what everyone is after. The best way to get them, again, coming back to an original point, is your brain, and your brain is wired to keep you alive. So it is going to be focused on any potential threat as a means to protect you. 

So knowing that, that’s how media and everyone uses that fact of your physiology to grab your attention, to lead with danger and all these negative things. So if you can just give yourself an hour to instead of let other people direct how your day is going to go and really own your hour and decide and declare that I am going to fill the first hour, half hour, whatever you allow, that that first fruit of your day needs to be given and stewarded in a way that it sets the tone and ripples you towards the compelling future that you want. Instead of I have to avoid all this stuff that I don’t want. 

Really start simple. The phone is the most effective thing, and that’s hard for a lot of people. I remember when I first did this years ago. It was like an addiction, and it’s just how we are in society. But it’s become normalized to the point where no one really questions it. But when you realize that by doing that, you’re giving control of your mind and focus to other people that just want your eyeballs, and want you to click and scroll and all this stuff, it puts you in the driver’s seat so that you can now intentionally be present on what you want to do. 

You can start simple. This is my routine. This has evolved over the years. I start off by saying, “Good morning, Jesus Christ. Holy Spirit, fill me and guide me, so I can be a blessing in your way through this day. Today is going to be an amazing, outstanding day.” Then I take a five-minute freezing cold shower, I read my devotional, I jump in the Bible, and then I’m off on my 45-minute walk. That’s how I start. 

Now, that might not be practical for you. You might genuinely like realistically have five minutes. In those five minutes, don’t be on your phone and start with the gratitude ripple, the GRIN. So start where you are to start listing things you’re grateful for. I promise, if you do that every day for 30 days, you’ll feel like a totally different person.

[00:33:11] TU: Yeah. It’s about winning the start of the day, whether that’s five minutes or three hours, right? Some people, maybe there’s more flexibility and time, whatever. Many folks, that’s not the case. Winning the day and the momentum and, as you mentioned, the ripple effect that can come from that. I love that. 

Mine has evolved over time, and there are certain seasons where I’m humming every day. There’s other seasons where I kind of fall off track. You give yourself some grace. You get back on. But I consistently come back to a noticeable, palpable difference. I’m sure Jess and the boys would say that they can see it as well when I start and win the day. Because what I have found, and this has taken a while to really, I think, realize and work through, is that things can just begin to quickly unravel, and you throw your hands up, if things aren’t going in the steps I think they should go. 

What I’ve really, especially with my four boys, is that it is rare, very rare, actually, that their behavior changes in any given day. It’s my perspective, patience, and mindset, coming into my interactions with them. When I walk out of my home office door, that first two to five minutes, which is on me and my responsibility, sets the tone for the rest of the evening, the rest of the evening. For the longest time, I’d kind of throw my hands up a little bit of a victim mentality of like, “Ah, man. They are so loud, Adam. They are so loud. Can’t they just be quiet?” It’s like I remember I had this conversation with my wife one time. It’s like, “They really don’t change a lot in any given day.” 

I mean, sure, there’s a behavior thing here there, but like it really is like my mindset, my preparation, my awareness. That, obviously, is talking more about the second half of the day. But same can be said, I think, for the first part of the day as well. 

[00:35:04] AM: Yes. Tim, you said something that was such a gem, I have to bring it to the forefront. You said, “I have to give myself some grace.” I really want everyone listening to this to understand, embody, and implement that. Because if you’re listening to this, chances are you’re not like – You’re going after the best version of you. 

I mean, if you’re listening to a podcast, if you’re in this community, it’s because you want more. You know you’re destined to be more, to give more, to do more, to contribute. Not just to improve your life but to be an impact on those that you are blessed to influence. That’s ultimate leadership is influence. So when you’re in this journey, remember that it is not about a destination. It’s about who you become in the process. It is about progress, not perfection. 

So if you’re wanting to be a good leader, if you’re wanting to be the best employee, wherever you are in your career, if you want to receive something like grace, because we all are very human, the best way to receive something is to give it. To the point of finances, so many people, one of the reasons that they want to save, and call me on this, if I’m wrong, Tim. You’re the pro of the pros. One of the reasons that people give to save money and make more is so that they can have more to give away. They can contribute to their church, whatever it might be. True or true. 

[00:36:36] TU: True, true. Yep. 

[00:36:38] AM: So here’s the challenge. This is very humbling, but this is literally the cheat codes for life. This is how it works. Whenever you identify whatever it is you want to receive, you must become it and go give it because, especially with finance, here’s the reality. If you won’t give a dime out of a dollar, you’ll never give a million out of a billion. So it’s not I’ll wait until. It’s how can you give from where you are right now. Because whatever you give will come back to you tenfold. 

Now, that’s not the reason that you give. But the secret, the life hack, the behind the scenes truth is that the secret to living is giving. When you embody that and say, “If I want this to come in my life, how can I become it,” and then use that to give and serve others, your life will never be the same, and you will actually start to find that you are smiling more than you ever thought possible.

[00:37:39] TU: Oh, man. That is so true and so much wisdom in that that I think we can fall into that trap, and it is a trap to think that in that day in the future, a future state when I’ve got X in the bank, at that point, like I’ll be ready in a position to give. To your point about building that habit and that muscle and making that a priority, so important. 

There you have it, the SMILE framework. As always, Dr. Adam Martin, it has been a pleasure. I’m so grateful for you as a friend and a colleague. For folks that don’t yet know you and follow your work, which I think are few and far between listening to this, but for folks that don’t, where’s the best place that they can go to stay in touch with you?

[00:38:22] AM: Thank you, Tim. So, so honored. So I’ve had the honor and privilege of working with and helping many pharmacists and students grow their personal brands all across the world. Your brand is my favorite because you embody the principles and values. You are the best steward of your gifts I’ve ever seen in my life. So it is such an honor. 

[00:38:40] TU: Thank you. 

[00:38:41] AM: I just want to give a shameless plug of real talk real real quick there. But if you want to see more smiling faces and goofy things, feel free. The best place to interact with me is on Instagram, all one word, @thefitpharmacist. I also have a podcast that I’ve been running for a little over five years now a new episode every week. It is The Fit Pharmacist Healthcare Podcast. That’s on your favorite podcast platforms, iHeart Radio, iTunes, Spotify. You name it, I’m there. So feel free to subscribe on there if you want more content, also on LinkedIn. But, yeah, feel free to interact and engage. 

But definitely make sure, if you’re not for some crazy reason, following Tim and Your Financial Pharmacist because he has such a gift for connecting and nurturing people that have an incredible spirit and value within them. That he invests and nurtures so that they can then become the people that go and nurture and gift them. Just an amazing quality that you have, Tim, and I’m just really inspired by you personally. So seriously, thank you for who you are and who you continue to become.

[00:39:50] TU: Awesome, man. That means the world to me, really, guys. I really appreciate that, and I’m so grateful for you and appreciate you taking the time to come on here. Thanks, Adam. 

[00:39:59] AM: An honor. Thank you. 

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:40:01] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]